Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 353

WWW.ANITE.

COM/NEMO

NEMO OUTDOOR
USER MANUAL

DOCUMENT NUMBER
NNNNNNNNN ISSUE N

Anite 2016
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Copyright
The information contained in this document is confidential and no part of it may be copied or
reproduced in any form without the written consent of Anite Network Testing. Additionally, this
document is not to be passed to or discussed with third parties without the prior written permission
of Anite Network Testing.

Anites products are subject to continual development and specifications may change. Users of
Anites products and documentation should exercise their own independent judgement to evaluate
the suitability of Anites products and documentation for their particular use. Anite does not accept
any liability arising from the application or use of the product or this documentation.

All reasonable care has been made to ensure that this document is accurate. If you have any
comments on this document, or would like details of any Anite products, services or equipment,
please contact us through the Anite website.

Page 2
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

CONTENTS

1 QUICK GUIDE .................................................................................................... 9


1.1 Setting up the system ................................................................................. 9
1.2 Using Nemo Outdoor ................................................................................ 10
1.2.1 Using Nemo Outdoor with command line options .................................. 11

2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ......................................................................................... 12


2.1 Licensing................................................................................................. 13
2.1.1 Migration process for old USB dongle keys ........................................... 14
2.1.2 Migration process for new USB dongle keys ......................................... 16
2.1.3 Technical support expiration .............................................................. 17
2.2 Important ............................................................................................... 17
2.2.1 Local laws and regulations ................................................................. 18
2.2.2 Nemo Outdoor laptop settings............................................................ 18
2.2.3 Traffic safety ................................................................................... 19
2.2.4 Operating environment ..................................................................... 20

3 NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW ................................................................. 21


3.1 Voice testing............................................................................................ 21
3.2 Circuit-switched data testing ..................................................................... 21
3.3 Packet-switched data testing ..................................................................... 21
3.4 Nemo Media Router .................................................................................. 22
3.4.1 Installing Nemo Media Router ............................................................ 22
3.4.2 Updating the Nemo Media Router SW and license ................................. 25
3.4.3 TeamViewer QuickSupport ................................................................. 26
3.5 Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite ........................................................................... 29
3.6 Nemo Invex II ......................................................................................... 30
3.7 Indoor measurements............................................................................... 31

4 INSTALLING NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM ............................................................... 32


4.1 Hardware and software requirements ......................................................... 32
4.2 Other hardware requirements .................................................................... 32
4.3 Nemo Outdoor software installation ............................................................ 33
4.4 Nemo Outdoor device set-up ..................................................................... 33
4.4.1 Connecting a GPS receiver ................................................................ 33
4.4.2 Connecting a scanner ....................................................................... 34
4.4.3 Connecting voice quality devices ........................................................ 34
4.5 Nemo Invex device set-up ......................................................................... 35
4.5.1 Nemo Invex Status view ................................................................... 39
4.5.2 Multiple data connections on one measurement server .......................... 41

Page 3
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

4.6 General guidelines for drive testing ............................................................ 42

5 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS .............................................................................. 45


5.1 Configuring Nemo Outdoor ........................................................................ 45
5.1.1 Configuration through Welcome page.................................................. 45
5.1.2 Configuration through Load Device Configuration dialog ........................ 48
5.1.3 Configuring Nemo Outdoor manually .................................................. 50
5.1.4 Use case 1. Start measurements automatically upon device startup ....... 50
5.2 Configuring test mobiles ........................................................................... 51
5.3 Configuration Manager .............................................................................. 51
5.3.1 Configuration Manager - Handler information ....................................... 53
5.3.2 Configuration Manager - User interface ............................................... 53
5.3.3 Configuration Manager - Notifications ................................................. 66
5.3.4 Configuration Manager - Scripts ......................................................... 70
5.3.5 Configuration Manager - Device configurations ..................................... 70
5.3.6 Configuration Manager - Devices ........................................................ 71
5.3.7 Configuration Manager - View groups.................................................. 77
5.3.8 Configuration Manager - Workspaces .................................................. 79
5.4 Measurement Properties dialog .................................................................. 80
5.4.1 Measurement Properties General ..................................................... 80
5.4.2 Measurement Properties Measurement ............................................. 81
5.4.3 Measurement Properties Frequency scanning with mobiles .................. 85
5.4.4 Measurement Properties Pilot scanning with mobiles .......................... 88
5.4.5 Measurement Properties Frequency, pilot, and spectrum scanning with
scanners ..................................................................................................... 89
5.4.6 Measurement Properties - Script ........................................................ 89

6 DURING MEASUREMENTS ................................................................................. 91


6.1 Textual notes ........................................................................................... 92
6.2 Nemo Commander remote control option for Nemo Outdoor/ Invex ................ 92
6.2.1 Nemo Commander server options ....................................................... 93
6.2.2 Initial field unit configuration ............................................................. 93
6.2.3 Measurement workflow ..................................................................... 94
6.2.4 Events reported by Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex to Nemo Commander..... 94
6.3 Making scanning measurements................................................................. 95
6.4 Making voice calls .................................................................................... 95
6.4.1 Voice Call Configuration .................................................................... 97
6.4.2 End-to-end call instructions ............................................................. 100
6.4.3 Push-to-Talk (PTT) testing ............................................................... 105
6.5 Voice quality measurements .................................................................... 109
6.6 Making video calls .................................................................................. 110
6.7 Data transfers........................................................................................ 112
6.7.1 Configuring the data connection ....................................................... 113
6.7.2 Configuring the FTP protocol ............................................................ 117
6.7.3 Configuring the SFTP protocol .......................................................... 120
6.7.4 Configuring the HTTP(S) protocol ..................................................... 122

Page 4
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.7.5 Configuring the (HTTP) browsing protocol .......................................... 125


6.7.6 Configuring the POP3 protocol .......................................................... 127
6.7.7 Configuring the SMTP protocol ......................................................... 128
6.7.8 Configuring the IMAP protocol .......................................................... 131
6.7.9 Configuring the WAP protocol........................................................... 133
6.7.10 Configuring the streaming protocol ................................................... 135
6.7.11 Configuring the trace route protocol ................................................. 136
6.7.12 Making data transfers ..................................................................... 138
6.8 Streaming video quality testing ................................................................ 138
6.8.1 PEVQ-S Properties dialog................................................................. 141
6.9 VoIP calls .............................................................................................. 142
6.10 Application testing .................................................................................. 145
6.10.1 Screencasting and touchscreen simulation ......................................... 145
6.10.2 Facebook testing ............................................................................ 149
6.10.3 Twitter testing ............................................................................... 151
6.10.4 Instagram testing ........................................................................... 154
6.10.5 Dropbox testing ............................................................................. 156
6.11 SMS testing ........................................................................................... 159
6.12 MMS testing .......................................................................................... 160
6.12.1 Packet session settings for MMS ....................................................... 160
6.12.2 MMS Editor dialog........................................................................... 162
6.12.3 Making MMS measurements ............................................................ 162
6.13 USSD testing ......................................................................................... 163
6.14 Start external application ........................................................................ 164
6.15 ICMP Ping ............................................................................................. 166
6.16 Indoor mode.......................................................................................... 167
6.16.1 Viewing indoor maps ...................................................................... 168
6.16.2 Floorplans and BTS files .................................................................. 171
6.16.3 Multiple routes and floorplans .......................................................... 173
6.16.4 Indoor route planning ..................................................................... 174
6.16.5 iBwave maps ................................................................................. 174
6.16.6 DAS anomaly analysis ..................................................................... 178
6.16.7 RF ingress analysis ......................................................................... 179
6.16.8 Indoor map popup menu ................................................................. 181
6.17 Measurement profiles ............................................................................. 188
6.18 IP packet capturing ................................................................................ 189
6.19 Making script files .................................................................................. 191
6.19.1 Script transfer stop commands......................................................... 192
6.19.2 Running scripts .............................................................................. 202
6.20 Measurement lists .................................................................................. 203
6.20.1 Measurement areas ........................................................................ 206
6.21 Forcing functions .................................................................................... 208
6.21.1 Channel locking.............................................................................. 209
6.21.2 Band locking .................................................................................. 211
6.21.3 Network selection ........................................................................... 212

Page 5
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.21.4 Handover control ............................................................................ 213


6.21.5 Cell barring ................................................................................... 218
6.21.6 Set terminal radio on/off (airplane mode) .......................................... 218
6.21.7 AMR codec forcing .......................................................................... 219
6.22 Cell testing ............................................................................................ 219
6.23 RF validation ......................................................................................... 221
6.23.1 RF test .......................................................................................... 221
6.23.2 Scanner and UE level check ............................................................. 224
6.23.3 Scanner configuration check ............................................................ 225
6.24 Missing neighbor detection ...................................................................... 225
6.24.1 Missing neighbor detection with a mobile .......................................... 225
6.24.2 Missing neighbor detection with a scanner/scanner and mobile ............ 227
6.25 Pilot pollution analysis ............................................................................ 228
6.25.1 UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone .................................... 229
6.25.2 UMTS pilot pollution analysis based on scanner measurements ............ 231
6.25.3 CDMA/EVDO pilot pollution analysis - Mobile phones ........................... 231
6.25.4 CDMA/EVDO pilot pollution analysis - Scanners .................................. 232
6.26 GSM interference analysis ....................................................................... 232
6.27 Band scan ............................................................................................. 235
6.28 Timeslot testing ..................................................................................... 237
6.29 Viewing graphs ...................................................................................... 239
6.29.1 Graph popup menu ......................................................................... 240
6.29.2 Zoom - Scatter graph ..................................................................... 245
6.29.3 Graph side panel Layers ............................................................... 246
6.29.4 Graph side panel Values and parameter ......................................... 253
6.29.5 Graph layer color configuration ........................................................ 254
6.29.6 Spectrum graphs ............................................................................ 260
6.29.7 Color grid graphs ........................................................................... 262
6.29.8 How to read MIMO parameters in a bar graph .................................... 262
6.30 Viewing grids ......................................................................................... 263
6.30.1 Find function in signaling grid based on decoded message ................... 264
6.30.2 Grid popup menu ........................................................................... 265
6.31 Viewing maps ........................................................................................ 280
6.31.1 Base stations on a map ................................................................... 282
6.31.2 MapX maps ................................................................................... 286
6.31.3 Route plans ................................................................................... 288
6.31.4 Map popup menu ........................................................................... 291
6.31.5 Color Set Editor.............................................................................. 306
6.32 Export/import settings ............................................................................ 308
6.32.1 Export settings to file ...................................................................... 308
6.32.2 Export settings to FTP server ........................................................... 309
6.32.3 Import settings from file ................................................................. 309
6.32.4 Import settings from FTP server ....................................................... 310

7 ENDING MEASUREMENTS ................................................................................ 311


7.1 Measurement report ............................................................................... 312

Page 6
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

8 MEASUREMENT RESULTS ................................................................................ 314


8.1 Analyzing measurement results ............................................................... 314
8.2 Playing back measurement files ............................................................... 314
8.2.1 Viewing and moving markers ........................................................... 315
8.2.2 Closing playback files ...................................................................... 316
8.3 Uploading measurement files to server ..................................................... 317
8.3.1 FTP send options ............................................................................ 318
8.3.2 HTTPS send options ........................................................................ 319
8.3.3 Nemo Xynergy send options ............................................................ 320
8.3.4 Dropbox send options ..................................................................... 322
8.3.5 Nemo Cloud send options ................................................................ 323
8.4 Exporting measurements ........................................................................ 324

9 USER INTERFACE ........................................................................................... 327


9.1 View groups .......................................................................................... 328
9.2 Status bar ............................................................................................. 329
9.3 Parameters view .................................................................................... 329
9.4 Customizing the ribbon and quick access toolbar ........................................ 330
9.5 Nemo Outdoor windows .......................................................................... 330
9.5.1 Custom windows ............................................................................ 331
9.5.2 Devices view.................................................................................. 332
9.5.3 Device Status view ......................................................................... 333
9.5.4 Output window............................................................................... 334
9.5.5 Script Status window ...................................................................... 334

10 TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................... 335


10.1 Low throughput ..................................................................................... 335
10.1.1 All Windows versions ...................................................................... 336
10.2 Device Status view ................................................................................. 339
10.3 Cannot add devices ................................................................................ 339
10.4 Required license option missing ............................................................... 339
10.5 Cannot make calls/packet transfers .......................................................... 340
10.6 Measurement file checksum notification .................................................... 340
10.7 Number of USB devices exceeded ............................................................ 340

11 SHORTCUT KEYS ............................................................................................ 341

12 NOTIFICATION SYMBOLS ................................................................................ 342

13 TECHNICAL SUPPORT ..................................................................................... 345


13.1 User Club .............................................................................................. 345
13.2 Nemo Support Portal .............................................................................. 345
13.3 Phone and Email Support ........................................................................ 345

14 APPENDIX 1 .................................................................................................. 347


14.1 Making MapInfo raster maps .................................................................. 347
14.1.1 Registering a raster map with MapInfo SW ...................................... 347

Page 7
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

15 END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ..................................................................... 349

Page 8
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

1 QUICK GUIDE

This quick guide will explain briefly how to set up the Nemo Outdoor measurement system and how
to start the actual measurements. Check the cross-references for more detailed explanations on
using Nemo Outdoor.

1.1 Setting up the system


Nemo Outdoor software license is tied to a HASP USB key and it is not possible to install
Nemo Outdoor without it.

Installing and running Nemo Outdoor requires administrator rights.

Do not upgrade, root, or reflash your measurement terminal firmware. Doing so will
cause the terminal to permanently lose its measurement capability!

1. Installing the software. Check the manual for hardware requirements if necessary (see
Hardware and software requirements). Run the Nemo Outdoor installation program Nemo
Outdoor.exe. The Nemo Outdoor SW and handlers are installed in the same setup.

2. When the installation is finished, restart the computer.

3. The measurement mobiles, GPS receiver, and scanner are connected to the
computers USB ports.

4. If you are making data measurements, you need to configure the measurement devices and
install drivers. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide provided in the
Nemo Outdoor package.

5. On the Welcome page, the Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a previously
viewed measurement with the attached devices for playback. In the Open a Device
Configuration tool you can select saved device configurations, and start the devices in
online mode, or decide to work offline first and connect and start them later by clicking the
Go offline button in Nemo Outdoor. In addition, the Automatic device detection
functionality in the Create New Device Configuration tool automatically detects devices
connected to the computer and assigns the appropriate, previously created COM ports to
them.

6. To view the Load Device Configuration dialog, click the Other.. button in the Open a
Device Configuration field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor dialog (see Configuration
through Load Device Configuration dialog).

Page 9
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

7. If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode, select a
premade device configuration and click Start Devices. All the devices included in the
device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements. If you
prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without connecting and
starting the measurement devices, select a pre-made device configuration and click the
Work Offline button. You can change the measurement configurations in the offline mode
and activate the device later. When you want to activate the devices, connect the devices to
the measurement system and click the Go Online button in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.

8. If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually, close the Welcome page or Load Device
Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor. You can go to File | Open
Measurement File, and select a saved measurement for playback, or you can open a
saved device configuration in File | Open Hardware Configuration and start a
measurement in online or offline mode. Alternatively, you can go to Measurement | Add
New Device, select a device and configure it for measurements. You can also do this from
the Configuration Manager (Ctrl+M) (see step 9). In addition, you can also use the
Autodetect functionality by clicking the Autodetect button in the main view, which
automatically detects a previously added device and its assigned COM ports.

9. To add measurement devices manually, click the Add button in the main view. Select the
device type (phone, scanner, GPS) that you want to add and select the device model from
the list. Click Next. In the Device Configuration dialog, select the correct COM ports and
click OK.

10. If you are using a GPS receiver, you will also need a map. Copy all the required map files to
the maps folder, for example, C:\Nemo Tools\Maps. To define the default map file and map
folder, select Settings | User Interface Properties | Paths. In the Maps field, select the
folder where map files are stored. In the Default map field, browse the default map file (see
User Interface Properties Paths).

11. If you have base station files (.nbf or .csv), copy them to the BTS files folder, for example,
C:\Nemo Tools\BTS files.

1.2 Using Nemo Outdoor


When a green light is blinking in the Device Status window, the device is connected properly and is
ready for measurements.

1. First, open some measurement windows through the Data Windows tab for monitoring the
measurement. Alternatively you can open a workspace (File | Open Workspace) that
contains some predefined views (graphs, grids, maps, etc.).

2. You can use Scripts (see Configuration Manager - Scripts) to generate a sequence of
actions that Nemo Outdoor will execute automatically. Click the
Device script settings button in the Devices view. Select an existing script in the Script
File field or create a new one by clicking the Script Editor button.

3. If you want to be notified about certain events during the measurement, use the
Notifications function. Click the Device notification settings button
in the Devices view to access the Notifications dialog.

Page 10
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

4. Run a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button . Nemo Outdoor will start the
recording automatically. To stop running the script, click the button again. To finish both the
recording and the script, click the Stop button .

5. To perform measurements manually, select the appropriate actions, such as, start voice call
or send MMS message, from the Measurement control menu.

6. Stop the recording by clicking the Stop button. Nemo Outdoor has recorded a measurement
file of the performed test calls/scan on the computers hard disk. You can playback the
measurement file by clicking the Playback button in the Report dialog. Click Rename to
change the file name.

1.2.1 Using Nemo Outdoor with command line options


Outdoor supports the following command line options. These command lines will enable the user to
enter a certain profile in Nemo Outdoor. You can enter the command lines either with Command
Prompt through Start | Run | cmd, or you can create a shortcut to Nemo Outdoor on the desktop
and enter the command line to the shortcuts Properties | Shortcut |Target field.

/W <workspace> will directly open the specified workspace in Nemo Outdoor

/H <hw config> will directly open the given device configuration in Nemo Outdoor

/M SIMPLE will open Nemo Outdoor in limited mode, in which the user is not able to save
any changes made to the device configuration or workspace

/DEBUGBIN will start debug logging

For example, the command line below will start Nemo Outdoor, load the test.worx workspace,
N95.hwcx device configuration, and prevent any changes possibly made to them from taking effect.

Outdoor /W test.worx /H N95.hwcx /M SIMPLE

Page 11
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN

This manual explains how to set up and operate the Nemo Outdoor Air Interface Measurement Tool
Software developed by Anite.

Nemo Outdoor is a portable engineering tool for measuring and monitoring the air interface of
digital networks. The supported network standards are:

cdmaOne 450, 800,1900 MHz


CDMA2000
1xEVDO
AMPS
DVB-H
EGPRS
GSM 850, 900, 1800, 1900 MHz
GPRS
HSDPA
HSUPA
HSPA+
LTE
TD-SCDMA
TETRA
iDEN
UMTS (FDD mode)
WiMAX

Nemo Outdoor is an effective tool for tracing digital networks. Nemo Outdoor collects measurement
results and geographical coordinates (when used with a GPS receiver) and stores them on a hard
disk. Measurement results provide useful information for network optimization, verification, and
maintenance purposes. Results can be efficiently and easily viewed with the Nemo analysis tool
Nemo Analyze.

Nemo Outdoor uses licensed technology from various manufacturers. For a complete list of
supported devices, see the Nemo Outdoor product description and data sheet.

Page 12
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

2.1 Licensing
Nemo Outdoor software license is tied to a HASP USB key and it is not possible to install Nemo
Outdoor without it. Software-based licenses are not available.

A new license type and dongle HW was introduced with Nemo Outdoor 7.5.0. All fielded dongle keys
and licenses must be migrated to a new dongle when used with Nemo Outdoor version 7.5.0 or
higher.

To make the migration easier for our customers, Anite Network Testing has developed a user-
friendly dongle migration tool that is capable of performing the migration. The old dongle key and
the new dongle key must be connected to the PC where the migration tool is installed. The tool
deactivates the old dongle and activates and registers the new one.

The new USB dongle key must be available before updating Nemo Outdoor application to
version 7.5.0 or higher. Nemo Outdoor version 7.5.0 or higher is not backwards
compatible with the old license dongles.

The computer used for the dongle migration must be connected to the internet.

If the old dongle key contains both Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze licenses, please do
not run the migration tool. Instead, contact nemo.support@anite.com.

Before running the migration tool, please check the TS Expiration date for the old dongle
key from the Nemo Outdoor File menu (File | License Information). If your technical
support agreement has expired, do not run the migration tool. Migration can be done only
with dongle keys that have a valid TS agreement. If your TS agreement has expired,
please contact Anite Network Testing, nemo.support@anite.com.

Before starting the migration process please check what kind of dongle key you are currently using
with Nemo Outdoor. If you have the old dongle key shown in Figure 1, please see the instructions in
chapter Migration process for old USB dongle keys.

Figure 1.Old dongle key.

If you have the new dongle key shown in Figure 2, please see the instructions in chapter Migration
process for new USB dongle keys.

Page 13
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Figure 2. New dongle key.

2.1.1 Migration process for old USB dongle keys


1. Anite sends an empty dongle (without a product license) automatically to all customers with a valid
TS agreement. The new dongle will be sent to a separately agreed customer address. In case you
have not been contacted by Anite regarding the dongle migration, please contact
nemosupport@anite.com.

2. After receiving the empty dongle, download and install the migration tool from:

www.nemo.fi/tools/migrationtool.zip

3. Extract the migration tool zip-file on the computer that has Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze
installed.

4. Plug in both the old and the new dongle key to the computer where you installed the migration tool.
Both dongles MUST be plugged in simultaneously.

Do not unplug the dongle keys during the migration process. This may permanently
damage the keys.

5. Run the DriverlessMigrationClient.exe file to start the migration tool.

Figure 3.Migration tool.

Page 14
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6. Make sure the migration tool identifies both dongles (keys) connected (Time and Time Driverless
dongles). They should appear in the Connected keys table.

7. Click the Migrate License button.

8. The migration tool reads the license details from the old dongle and sends the details to Anite
Network Testing over the internet.

9. Anite creates a new license with a similar configuration and sends the new license to the migration
tool over the internet.

10. The migration tool activates the new dongle and writes the new license details on the dongle. The
migration tool also tests that the new dongle works properly.

11. After testing that the new dongle works properly, the migration tool deactivates the old dongle and
informs the customer that the migration process was successful and the new dongle with the
product license is ready for use.

12. The migration tool can now be uninstalled and the old dongle key can be disposed of.

Page 15
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

2.1.2 Migration process for new USB dongle keys


1. Download and install the migration tool from:

www.nemo.fi/tools/migrationtool.zip

2. Extract the migration tool zip-file on the computer that has Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze
installed.

3. Plug in the dongle key to the computer where you installed the migration tool.

Do not unplug the dongle key during the migration process. This may permanently damage the
key.

4. Run the DriverlessMigrationClient.exe file to start the migration tool.

Figure 4. Migration tool.

5. Click the Migrate License button.

6. The migration tool reads the license details from the dongle and sends the details to Anite Network
Testing over the internet.

7. Anite creates a new license with a similar configuration and sends the new license to the migration
tool over the internet.

8. The migration tool writes the new license details on the dongle. The migration tool also tests that
the dongle works properly.

9. After testing that the dongle works properly, the migration tool informs the customer that the
migration process was successful and the dongle with the new product license is ready for use.

10. The migration tool can now be uninstalled.

Page 16
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

2.1.3 Technical support expiration


The USB dongle keys used with Nemo Outdoor include a compulsory technical support and
maintenance agreement option. The technical support expiration date defines the date the
agreement ends. After this date it is not possible to start the new version of the Nemo Outdoor
application. Example: A customer has purchased Nemo Outdoor version 7.50 with a 1-year
technical support maintenance agreement in April 2015. The customer is entitled for free updates
until April 2016. Nemo Outdoor versions released after April 2016 cannot be used with the USB key
without renewing the technical support & maintenance agreement. After the technical support &
maintenance agreement is renewed, the key can be updated remotely and the customer can update
the application to the latest version.

2.2 Important
Installing and running Nemo Outdoor requires administrator rights.

Do not upgrade, root, or reflash your measurement terminal firmware. Doing so will
cause the terminal to permanently lose its measurement capability!

The Nemo Outdoor user must be appropriately trained and should be familiar with the signaling
behind wireless technologies.

The Qualcomm handlers enables the use of Qualcomm CDMA2000, MSM6500, MSM6800, TM6200,
TM6250, TM6275, TM6275US, TM7200, and TM8200 chipset-based terminals that have not been
verified by Anite. These terminals can be used with Nemo Outdoor but Anite does not guarantee
that the terminals will work flawlessly. Please check the Nemo Outdoor product description for a list
of measurement terminals verified and approved by Anite.

Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test mobiles keypad to make or answer calls when the Nemo
Outdoor system is running.

With Samsung terminals the key tone volume should be turned off. Otherwise, the mobile can dial a
wrong number.

With Nokia GSM, GPRS, and EDGE terminals the test display (Net Monitor) must not be activated.

In voice quality measurements the volume of the mobile headset must be adjusted to correct
levels. Please refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide document.

Do not place stickers containing metal on the mobile because it may lower the transmission power
of the mobile.

After the measurements have been completed and it is desired to take the Nemo Outdoor test
mobile into normal use, it must be powered off and on again to deselect/deactivate the Nemo
Outdoor triggered events in the mobile.

Use only the supplied connecting cable, included with the Nemo Outdoor, for connecting the Nemo
Outdoor test devices to the computers USB port.

When using the Nemo Outdoor test mobile for measurement use, the battery operation time is
reduced from normal use. The best operation times will be achieved when the batteries are
regularly charged and discharged as instructed in the mobile user manual.

Page 17
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

2.2.1 Local laws and regulations


Note that the local laws and/or regulations may set limitations, restrictions or other obligations on
the use of the Nemo Outdoor and/or the test devices. Observe the laws and regulations of the
country (as well as of any other relevant jurisdiction) where the Nemo Outdoor and/or test device is
used. Anite assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the failure to comply with the local
laws and/or regulations.

2.2.2 Nemo Outdoor laptop settings


The laptops used for running Nemo Outdoor need to be set up before measurements. Below are
described the most important settings that may have an effect on the measurement results.

2.2.2.1 Power options


Before you begin using Nemo Outdoor, you need to set the power management options of the
laptop to High performance to avoid disruptions in the performance of Nemo Outdoor. Go to
Control Panel | System and Security | Power Options. Select the High performance power
plan.

2.2.2.2 Active protection system


If there is a system that detects acceleration in the laptop and causes the hard disk to stop when
jolted, it should be turned off. Otherwise, there may be breaks in measurement data. In voice
quality testing there may be missing MOS scores, and with other test devices, gaps in the
measurement data.

With Lenovo laptops, select Control Panel | System and Security | Lenovo Active Protection.
On the Configuration page, deselect the Enable Active Protection System option.

Page 18
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

2.2.2.3 USB hub properties


Also, check the generic USB hub properties. Go to Device Manager, expand the Universal Serial
Bus controllers item, right-click the Generic USB Hub item and select Properties. Open the
Power Management tab and check that the Allow the computer to turn off this device to
save power option is deselected. Repeat this for all the Generic USB Hub items.

2.2.3 Traffic safety


Do not operate Nemo Outdoor and drive (or walk) at the same time. Remember, traffic safety
comes first.

Note that in some countries it is illegal to drive a car and operate a computer at the same time.
Please observe the legislation of the country where the measurements are performed. Anite
assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the failure to comply with local legislation.

Always observe the local speed limits and traffic regulations when conducting drive testing.

Page 19
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

2.2.4 Operating environment


Do not operate Nemo Outdoor without reading the User Manual, including its warnings, for the
devices used by Nemo Outdoor.

Always stop using Nemo Outdoor and switch off the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) when it is
forbidden to use radio equipment or when it may cause interference or danger.

Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) in a hospital. It may interfere with nearby electronic
devices.

Never use Nemo Outdoor in an aircraft. The use of mobiles in an aircraft may be dangerous.

Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in gas stations, fuel depots, chemical plants, or
sites where blasting operations are in progress.

Page 20
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

3 NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW

3.1 Voice testing


The voice testing environment consists of Nemo Outdoor compatible mobiles and a PC (user
provided or, optionally, provided by Anite with all the software installed). The package also includes
the necessary connecting cables, serial or USB port adapters, a GPS receiver, and fast frequency
scanners if applicable. Also the Nemo Voice Quality option is available.

3.2 Circuit-switched data testing


The circuit-switched (CS) data testing environment consists of three parts: a measurement unit
(Nemo Outdoor), an application server, and a data server. The data server is used to establish a
data connection between the measurement unit and the application server. Nemo Data Test Server
can be used as the application server. It is a Linux-based administration-free server having up to
four public IP addresses and it can serve multiple simultaneous TCP/IP connections from test
terminals. CS data testing is possible on all cellular technologies that support circuit-switched data.

The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. In the Send mode, the
measurement unit sends data packets to the application server; in the Receive mode vice versa. If
you are using a FTP server, the measurement unit uploads (Send mode) or downloads (Receive
mode) test files to or from the FTP server. If you are using an HTTP server, the measurement unit
can only receive files.

The user can define the number of timeslots and the coding schemes, which in turn define the
desired transfer rate. During the measurement, the user will be able to monitor data throughputs
and error rates on different network layers, as well as certain parameters, such as coding scheme
and number of timeslots.

3.3 Packet-switched data testing


The packet-switched (PS) data testing environments consist of two ends: the measurement unit
and an application server. Nemo Data Test Server can be used as the application server. It is a
Linux-based administration-free server having up to four public IP addresses and it can serve
multiple simultaneous TCP/IP connections from test terminals. PS data testing is possible on all
cellular technologies that support packet-switched data.

The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. In the Send mode, the
measurement unit sends data packets to the application server; in the Receive mode vice versa. If
you are using an FTP server, the measurement unit uploads (Send mode) or downloads (Receive
mode) test files to or from the FTP server. If you are using an HTTP server, the measurement unit
can only receive files.

During the measurement, the user will be able to monitor data throughputs and error rates on
different network layers, as well as certain parameters such as coding scheme and number of
timeslots.

Page 21
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

3.4 Nemo Media Router


Nemo Media Router (NMR) is Anites proprietary communications interface and application
developed for Android-based smartphones. With the NMR interface, smartphones communicate with
PC-based applications, such as, Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Invex, enabling voice quality
(PESQ/POLQA) measurements and data transfers on smartphones without any additional hardware.

When performing voice quality measurements with NMR, the smartphone records the received
sample audio files and transfers audio files via the NMR interface to the test computer in real time.
The computer calculates the PESQ/POLQA MOS scores and the values are written in the Nemo
Outdoor log file. Eight phones can be connected to one CPU simultaneously.

Also data transfers can be made using Nemo Media Router installed on the smartphone. Please
check the Nemo Media Router data sheet for a list of supported devices and features.

NMR versions 1.0 and 1.1 are not supported with Nemo Outdoor version 7.3.0.x and later.
Customers using Nemo Media Router 1.0 or 1.1 should not update Nemo Outdoor to the
latest version before updating the Nemo Media Router application on the test handsets.
Nemo Media Router application and update instructions are available from the Nemo User
Club http://nemouserclub.anite.com.

NMR Voice Quality Testing Option can be fetched from NMR license server automatically
for all the currently fielded units by launching the Nemo Media Router 2.00 application on
the phone after installation.

3.4.1 Installing Nemo Media Router


This chapter will describe the steps for setting up and configuring Nemo Media Router. Handsets
ordered with Nemo Media Route come preinstalled from Anite. If you wish to use your existing
Nemo Outdoor test terminals, please install the Nemo Media Router first. Please check the Nemo
Media Router data sheet for a list of supported devices.

Requirements:

Nemo Handy firmware

1. First install the Nemo Media Router on the mobile (if not preinstalled by Anite). Connect the
device to your laptop with a USB cable. Copy the NemoMediaRouter.apk file on your device
in the Nemo folder.

Page 22
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

2. Select Apps | My files on your device and browse to the Nemo folder. Tap the
NemoMediaRouter.apk file.

3. Select Install. When the installation is finished, select Open.

4. After the Nemo Media Router application has started, restart the device.

5. When the device has restarted, connect the device with Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex.

Page 23
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6. When the device is connected with Nemo Outdoor/Invex, the Nemo Media Router
application is started automatically. If the Nemo Media Router does not appear, start the
application manually, reboot the device, and try again adding the device to Nemo Outdoor.

7. The Outdoor option should be selected as the USB configuration from the bottom of the
view.

8. In the Device Configuration Port settings page, select Automatic in the Nemo
Media Router field and define the correct Trace and Modem ports. Click OK. The device is
now ready.

Page 24
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

3.4.2 Updating the Nemo Media Router SW and license


After installation, existing Nemo Media Router users can fetch software updates and a license over-
the-air from the NMR license server by launching the Nemo Media Router application on the phone.

In the License Browser view, select the correct license.

Confirm by selecting Load.

After the license has been loaded, the device needs to be restarted. Once the device restarts, you
can connect the device to Nemo Outdoor. Nemo Media Router will start automatically.

Page 25
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

To check for software updates, make sure that WiFi or mobile data (with HIM devices) is enabled,
press the button at the bottom of the NMR main view and select Check for updates.

3.4.3 TeamViewer QuickSupport


When handset isolation modules are used in Nemo Invex II, changing settings and updating the
NMR software can be done remotely with TeamViewer QuickSupport without opening the housing.
With TeamViewer it is possible to make a remote connection to the test handset via the Nemo
Outdoor user interface. Please note that one active connection at a time is supported, i.e.
connections to several handsets simultaneously are not possible. The laptop running Nemo Outdoor
must be connected to the internet, for example, by using a dedicated handset or a USB modem
connected to the controlling laptop. The test handset must be in service and support data services.
Packet data must be enabled.

The TeamViewer Quick Support (QS) application and TeamViewer Remote Control add-on module
are preinstalled to all test handsets delivered by Anite Network Testing with the Nemo Invex
handset isolation modules. TeamViewer must be installed also to the PC running Nemo Outdoor.
These applications can be downloaded from the Nemo User Club.

Please note that TeamViewer can be used free of charge only with non-commercial use.
Customers using the UI monitoring and controlling with the TeamViewer tools for
commercial use must obtain the licenses directly from TeamViewer
(www.teamviewer.com).

Page 26
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

To control the NMR device from Nemo Outdoor, right-click the device in the Devices view and select
Open Remote Connection.

Nemo Outdoor will connect to the device and open the TeamViewer window with a view of the
device screen. You can now control the device.

Page 27
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Page 28
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

3.5 Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite


The 4th generation Nemo Multi Lite is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking solution for use
with Nemo Outdoor. Benchmarking measurements can be performed on various system
technologies and networks with support for up to eight test mobiles/data cards, a scanner and a
sound card. In addition, the system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-option allows the use
of different combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls, voice quality calls and data
transfers simultaneously. The system is connected to a single laptop, saving space in the test
vehicle during drive testing and adding to the ease of use of the system.

Page 29
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

3.6 Nemo Invex II

Nemo Invex II is the most powerful and advanced benchmarking system for testing with large
wireless device configurations with high data rates LTE-A Cat 6 and beyond - with rich suite of
application testing options. The system enables testing with up to 50 test UEs and with up to three
scanners simultaneously with lower power consumption per device, giving operators, network
vendors, regulators, and contractors the possibility to benchmark voice and data services on all
available wireless technologies in one test drive.

In the new Nemo Invex II design, the main focus has been on reliability in extreme conditions. The
design boasts sophisticated built-in cooling and heating and replaceable air filters. The enhanced
capacity of Nemo Invex II offers support for the largest number of test devices in the world. Yet,
power efficiency has not been overlooked: the power usage per UIC has been cut in half thanks to
the innovative design.

The system has improved UPS functions including backup for scanners as well as built-in monitoring
for power, temperature, and current maintaining the measurement system at optimal temperature.
Furthermore, USB charging 1.2 compliant ports enable the charging of the measurement devices in
long measurement sessions. Native SuperSpeed USB 3.0 ports support LTE-A Cat 6 test devices
and beyond.

The one size chassis allows totally free mix and match modularity between the chassis via the
advanced Invex Chassis NET communication interface. Compared to current commercial
benchmarking systems, the need for manual cabling has been reduced dramatically. The system is
designed for easy installation and usage in cars with wireless connectivity to the control PC, built-in
ambient lights and KVM (keyboard, video, and mouse) for improved usability even in
environments with less light.

Page 30
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

3.7 Indoor measurements


Nemo Outdoor has an indoor mode measurement option in which case Nemo Outdoor can be
installed on a Tablet PC. Alternatively, a regular laptop can be used as well. As GPS receivers
cannot be used indoors, the indoor option offers a marker function to store location data. Just click
markers along the measurement route and the route will be drawn on the map. It is also possible to
use BTS files with floorplans. With Nemo Walker, test equipment can be easily taken inside
buildings.

Page 31
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

4 INSTALLING NEMO OUTDOOR


SYSTEM

This section provides the basic instructions for installing Nemo Outdoor software and devices. Make
sure you have all the listed equipment before starting the software installation. Use the Nemo
Outdoor setup program to install Nemo Outdoor; that is, do not just copy the Nemo Outdoor files
onto your computer.

Note that installation must be run under Administrator account or other user account
with administrative privileges. Note that if the existing Nemo Outdoor version is 6.2.1.x
or older it must be uninstalled via add or remove programs before the Nemo Outdoor 7.x
installation can be ran. During Sentinel HASP driver installation, you are prompted to
restart the computer. Press Restart later to continue with the Nemo Outdoor
installation.

4.1 Hardware and software requirements


PC (Lenovo or Dell recommended) with Windows 7 Professional (32/64 bit), Windows
8, and Windows 10

Processor Intel Core i7 2.66GHz or higher

SSD drive recommended

500 MB of free hard disk space for installation and use; 4 GB recommended

One USB port for copy protection module

One USB 3.0 port for test device

Ethernet port RJ45

Display resolution 1400 x 900 recommended

Memory 4GB RAM minimum, 8GB recommended

PDF reader for opening the user manual

4.2 Other hardware requirements


The following hardware is also supported for using Nemo Outdoor. Please note that the scanning
receivers and many of the GPS receivers require also +12 V DC power supply (e.g., from cigarette
lighter plug).

External power supply recommended for computer if vehicle mounted

GPS receiver: (optional, following types are supported)

o Garmin GPS II

o Garmin GPS II Plus

Page 32
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

o Garmin GPS III/III+

o Garmin GPS 35

o Garmin V

o Garmin 18 USB

o Trimble Placer 450/455 (TAIP) and GPS antenna unit

o Most other GPS receivers with NMEA 0183 compatible output

Nemo Outdoor software is protected with a HASP USB key (see Licensing)

4.3 Nemo Outdoor software installation


To install or upgrade Nemo Outdoor:
If you have a previous version of Nemo Outdoor installed, please remove it before
installation. Go to Control Panel and select Programs | Uninstall a program. Righ-click on
Nemo Outdoor and select Uninstall.

Note that installation must be run under Administrator account or other user account
with administrative privileges.

1. Select Start | Run in the Windows Status bar. Type D:\Nemo Outdoor\Nemo Outdoor
x.xx.xx in the Open field (xx refers to the version number) and click the OK button. When
the Installation program starts, follow the instructions on your screen. We recommend that
you select the Complete setup type.

2. When the Nemo Outdoor software installation is complete, you will need to restart the
computer.

To uninstall Nemo Outdoor:


1. Go to Control Panel and select Programs | Uninstall a program. Righ-click on Nemo
Outdoor and select Uninstall.

Note that uninstallation must be run under Administrator account or other user account
with administrative privileges.

4.4 Nemo Outdoor device set-up


Below you will find instructions for connecting devices to the Nemo Outdoor measurement system.
However, instructions for devices that require a data connection can be found in the Device
Configuration Guide.

4.4.1 Connecting a GPS receiver


1. Plug the GPS USB cable into a USB port on your computer.

2. Windows will automatically detect the new device and install the necessary drivers.

3. Start Nemo Outdoor. Select Add | GPS.

Page 33
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

4. Select your GPS model from the list and click Next.

5. Select the USB port to which your GPS receiver is connected. The program automatically
sets the other parameters to match your navigator selection.

6. Click OK. Your GPS receiver is now ready for measurements.

4.4.2 Connecting a scanner


See the Nemo Scanner Guide and Nemo FSR1 User Manual documents for information on how to
connect and start scanners with Nemo Outdoor.

4.4.3 Connecting voice quality devices


Please refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide document for complete installation and configuration
instructions.

Page 34
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

4.5 Nemo Invex device set-up


After the Nemo Invex chassis has been set up and configured, you can connect the measurement
servers (UIC modules in the Nemo Invex chassis) and devices to Nemo Outdoor. Start Nemo
Outdoor with the Nemo Invex license option. Click the Measurement servers button in the
Devices view.

A list of available measurement servers and UICs is displayed. Click Refresh to find all
measurement servers connected to the system.

To connect to a measurement server, select the server and click Connect. The State will change to
Connected. Repeat this for each measurement server that you want to connect with Nemo Outdoor.
Finally, click Close.

The Devices view will display all connected measurement servers. The Local item refers to devices
connected directly to the Nemo Outdoor laptop. Click the Autodetect button to detect devices
connected to the measurement servers.

Page 35
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

A list of devices connected to each measurement server is displayed. Define whether the device will
be used for voice quality or data measurements. Read chapter Multiple data connections on one
measurement server for more information on having two active data connections on a single
measurement server.

If you are adding a scanner, click the scanner name and select the frequency configuration
supported by the scanner.

Page 36
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Finally click Online. The Start Devices dialog opens. Here you can review the UIC and device
information. If you are happy with the configuration, click Online or Offline to add the devices to
Nemo Outdoor.

You can also restart and reboot the UICs, the OS, and the USB ports or individual UIC modules.
Right-click on the UIC and select the command from the context menu.

Page 37
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

The Nemo FSR1 scanner needs to be added manually. Click the Add button in the Home tab, select
the Nemo FSR1 and select a UIC in the field at the bottom of the dialog.

It is possible to save the device configuration by selecting File | Save Device Configuration As.
This way all the devices can be loaded automatically the next time you start Nemo Outdoor.

To disconnect measurement servers, click the Measurement servers button, select a


measurement server and click Disconnect.

Page 38
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

4.5.1 Nemo Invex Status view


The Nemo Invex Status view displays information about the current Nemo Invex hardware
configuration. The image shows the actual configuration and relevant health information for the
selected module. If there are more than one chassis, the chassis are numbered and you can
arrange the view by dragging and dropping the chassis. The Nemo Invex Status view also displays
all possible hardware alerts, such as high/low voltage and battery shutdown.

The UIC and HIM module connections are color-coded. If you select a HIM module from the image,
the USB port where the HIM module is connected to will be highlighted with the same color.

Page 39
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

You can also reset individual USB ports by right-clicking the USB port in the image and selecting the
command from the context menu.

From the Nemo Invex Status view context menu you can Enable Debug Logging for individual
UICs. First run Nemo Outdoor in debug mode and then connect to the UIC to activate the
command.

Select Export HW Information to a Text File to save the Nemo Invex II hardware information
containing all chassis and module versions and HW health information in a text file. Note that the
UICs need to be connected in order to export the information.

Page 40
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

The Nemo Invex Systems view displays detailed information about the UICs and the devices. You
can disconnect UICs and refresh the view. For HIM modules, the device information is shown.

4.5.2 Multiple data connections on one measurement server


You can have multiple (with Nemo Invex II up to six) active data connections on a single
measurement server. For example, MMS can be tested with one test device while another device is
performing an FTP transfer. The data routing option is enabled by default with Nemo Invex allowing
more than one active data connection. However, when routing table modifications is enabled, there
are some limitations with data testing. For example, it is required that different source IP addresses
for data testing are used. This means that the host IP address or URL must be different for
each test device.

Page 41
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Routing table modification should be disabled when only one active data connection is required.
Select Settings | User Interface Properties | Measurement and set Enable routing table
modifications for devices to No.

If routing table modification is disabled when performing multi-data testing with one measurement
server, problems may be caused when several data connections are opened from one host
computer to the terminals. All data connections to be established travel along one connection
between the host computer and the terminal, i.e. all data connections are routed via one terminal,
not via different terminals and their interfaces. This will distort the test results.

4.6 General guidelines for drive testing


Check the condition of all antennas, cables, and connectors: there should be no tight curves, no
slashes or cuts.

Check that connectors are properly connected. Loose connections cause unstable measurements or
wrong attenuation of field strength.

Place antennas properly on the roof of the vehicle. Antennas should be installed as symmetrically as
possible and at least one wavelength from the corners and roof windows, and two wavelengths from
each other. If antennas are too close to each other, it may cause interference.

Page 42
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

=c/f
c = 300E6 (m/s)
f = frequency (Hz)

450 MHz, = 66 cm
900 MHz, = 33 cm
1800 MHz, = 17 cm

Check the configuration before starting the measurement.

Band (MHz)

450 66 cm (26)

700 42 cm (18)

850 35 cm (14)

900 33 cm (13)

1800 17 cm (7)

1900 16 cm (6.3)

2100 14 cm (5.5)

2300 13 cm (5.1)

2500 12 cm (4.7)

2600 11 cm (4.3)

GPS (1565- 1575) 19 cm (7.5)

Individual antennas and the mobile holder antenna couplers may have different
performance.

When removing antennas after a drive test, DO NOT pull antennas from the antenna
cables. Hold the antenna from the base and tilt the antenna away from the cable.

Page 43
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Check the condition of all RF cables, and connectors: no tight curves, no slashes or cuts.

Check that RF connectors are properly connected. Loose connections cause unstable
measurements or wrong attenuation of signals. Use the SMA torque wrench to tighten
the connectors

Minimum distance between antennas, at least one wavelength from the corners and roof
windows, and two wavelengths from each other

Individual antennas may have different performance. Therefore use only one antenna
type with all test devices

When removing antennas after a drive test, DO NOT pull antennas from the antenna
cables. Hold the antenna from the base and tilt the antenna away from the cable.

Any unused RF connectors in the RF-splitters must be terminated.

RF-splitters shall be used only for test UEs. If RF-splitters are used also with scanners,
separate RF-splitters must be used.

Main and MIMO RF cables of the same UE shall not be connected to the same RF-splitter
as it would disable the MIMO/diversity.

Page 44
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

5 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS

After you have installed Nemo Outdoor, you will need to configure the system for your environment
before you will be able to use the measurement functions. The following instructions will help you in
this initial configuration.

5.1 Configuring Nemo Outdoor


You have three different ways to start using Nemo Outdoor. For a first-time user the most
convenient way is to start with the Welcome page and proceed from there. Older users of Nemo
Outdoor may want to use the Load Device Configuration dialog, and more advanced users may
want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually.

5.1.1 Configuration through Welcome page


1. The Nemo Outdoor Welcome page offers an easy way to configure the system for a first-
time user, and also helps more advanced users to add new devices. It appears on the
screen when you start Nemo Outdoor. If you do not want to view this window in the future
when opening Nemo Outdoor, select the Do not show this again option.

2. With the Autodetect functionality, you can automatically add devices to Nemo Outdoor
without needing to manually set up the system. This functionality automatically searches
the Device Manager for the assigned modem and trace COM port information.

Please note that the automatic detection is only available for devices connected with a
USB cable. Furthermore, you may need to select the correct device model from the drop-
down menu.

Page 45
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Note that this functionality varies depending on the device vendor. In addition, you may
need to configure the device before connecting it to Nemo Outdoor. Please refer to the
Nemo Outdoor Device Configuration Guide for instructions on how to do this. The device
may also require additional configurations in its modem settings.

3. You can start the devices in online mode by clicking Start Devices, start them in offline
mode by clicking Go Offline, or refresh the device configuration by clicking Refresh on the
bottom right-hand corner of the window. This is useful, e.g., when you accidentally unplug a
device and plug it in again.

4. PIN code requests should be turned off for all devices but in case there is a pending PIN
code request for a test device, a dialog will be displayed where you can enter the PIN code.
After pressing OK, PIN code requesting will be disabled from the device.

5. You can also open a workspace file from the Welcome dialog.

Page 46
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6. With the Open a Device Configuration tool you can select saved device configurations.
This includes the trace and modem COM ports assigned to the device. If you would like to
start Nemo Outdoor in online mode, select a pre-made device configuration and a
workspace and click Start Devices. All the devices included in the device configuration file
will be activated and you are ready to start measurements.

7. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without connecting
and starting the measurement devices, select a pre-made device configuration and click the
Go Offline button. If you want, you can configure the devices manually and activate them.
When you want to activate the devices, connect the devices to the measurement system
and click the Go Online button in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.

8. The Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a previously viewed measurement
with the attached devices for playback. In the Workspace field you can select a workspace
for the measurement. Click Load Selected Files.

Page 47
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

5.1.2 Configuration through Load Device Configuration dialog


To view the Load Device Configuration dialog, click Other in the Open a Device Configuration
field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor window.

1. If you have used Nemo Outdoor previously and saved a device configuration and a
workspace, Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would like to load a device configuration and a
workspace. If you are a first-time user of Nemo Outdoor, go to step 4.

Page 48
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

2. If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode, select a pre-
made device configuration and a workspace and click Online. All the devices included in the
device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements.

3. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without connecting
and starting the measurement devices, select a pre-made device configuration and click the
Offline button in the Load Device Configuration dialog. You can change the
measurement configurations in the offline mode and activate the device. When you want to
activate the devices, connect the devices to the measurement system and click the Go
Online button in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.

4. In the Load Device Configuration dialog, select Empty Device Configuration and click
Start Devices. An empty Nemo Outdoor main window appears.

5. Add a device by clicking the Add button in the Devices view. Choose the appropriate
phone, scanner, or GPS receiver from the list and click Next.

6. All Qualcomm terminals are unified into one Qualcomm handler. Nemo Outdoor application
detects the chipset of the test device and activates traces accordingly.

7. A properties dialog will be opened for the selected device. Set the appropriate values.

8. Click on Measurement Properties in the Device Configuration dialog to enter the


Measurement Properties dialog. Here you will find device-specific measurement settings.
Set the appropriate parameters and click OK.

9. Double-click the User Interface item in the Configuration Manager (Alt+M) to open the User
Interface Properties dialog. Here you will find general measurement settings that affect all
devices. Set the appropriate parameters and click OK. You can now start the
measurements.

Page 49
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

5.1.3 Configuring Nemo Outdoor manually


If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually, close the Welcome page or Load Device
Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor. You can go to File | Open Measurement, and
select a saved measurement for playback, or you can open a saved device configuration in File |
Open Device Configuration and start a measurement in online or offline mode. Alternatively, you
can go to Measurement | Add New Device, select a device and configure it for measurements.

In addition, you can use the Autodetect devices functionality which automatically detects a
previously added device and its assigned COM ports. Click the Autodetect Devices button in the
toolbar.

A dialog with a list of previously added devices appears. In the Label field you can type a name for
the device. Select the devices you want to add, define whether the device is in data mode or voice
quality mode, and click the Online or Offline button at the bottom of the dialog.

5.1.4 Use case 1. Start measurements automatically upon device startup


The following example case exemplifies the process of setting up Nemo Outdoor to start recording
automatically when devices are connected and started.

In the Nemo Outdoor main view, perform the following configurations.

1. Go to View | User Interface Properties.

Page 50
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

2. On the Measurement page, set the Start recording automatically when devices are
started and Start scripts automatically options to Yes. Click OK.

3. Save the workspace and device configuration files by selecting File | Save Workspace As,
and File | Save Device Configuration As.

4. Close Nemo Outdoor. The next time you start Nemo Outdoor, measurements will start
automatically as long as the correct device configuration file and workspace are selected.

5.2 Configuring test mobiles


To configure the Nemo Outdoor test mobiles for data testing purposes, see the Device Configuration
Guide provided by Anite.

PIN Code Request and Automatic Redial options must be turned OFF. Please consult the
mobile user manual to find these options from the mobile.

Always keep the test mobile connected to a charger, if possible, when carrying out
measurements.

5.3 Configuration Manager


Configuring Nemo Outdoor for your environment is accomplished in the Configuration Manager.
You can access the view either by pressing Ctrl+M or by clicking the Configuration Manager
toolbar button .

The Configuration Manager view consists of several items. Double-click an item on the list to edit
the item.

Page 51
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

The System Properties view shows the general system properties for Nemo Outdoor.

Under Measurement Servers are listed all Nemo Invex measurement servers connected to the
system. Select a server to view some hardware status information for the server.

Page 52
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

5.3.1 Configuration Manager - Handler information

Under Handler Information, you will find a list of handlers that have been installed on your
computer. All the handlers that you have purchased can be found in the Nemo Outdoor product
package. Each device has its own handler, and in order to use them in Nemo Outdoor, you must
have the corresponding handler installed.

5.3.2 Configuration Manager - User interface

Under the User Interface item, you will find several items. Double-click on the User Interface
Properties item to open the User Interface Properties dialog.

The Custom Windows folder contains premade measurement windows for quick startup.

Under Color Palettes you will find colors used in the views (see User Interface Properties
Colors).

Page 53
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Clicking on Color Sets will display the available color sets in the Configuration Manager view. For
further information on how to create color sets, see chapter Color Set Editor.

You can define the format in which various parameter values are presented through the
Presentation modes item (see User Interface Properties Presentation).

Operators and CDMA Operators displays a list of operator names along with the respective MCC
and MNC codes. To add new operators to the list, double-click the Operators or CDMA Operators
item in the Configuration Manage and click the Add button. Enter the Operator name, MCC, and
MNC. For CDMA operators, add the operator name and SID.

Page 54
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

5.3.2.1 User Interface Properties General

Save workspace settings on exit option defines whether the workspace settings are saved when
you exit the SW so that they will be activated automatically, for example, windows will be opened
the next time you start the SW.

Selecting the Show a dialog for critical errors option will display a message box when there is a
problem with one of the devices or with the measurement file writing.

Select the Open Script Status window when script is started option to automatically open the
Script Status window when script files are used in measurements.

Select the Play audio quality samples during playback option to play the audio samples used in
audio quality measurements also during playback.

When the Show welcome window when application is launched option is selected, the
Welcome to Nemo Outdoor window is displayed.

Selecting the Show Close Full Screen window in Full Screen mode option will enable you to
exit the Full Screen mode through an UI button.

With the Show 'Debug log file management' dialog on exit option selected, a dialog with a list
of the logged debug files is displayed when Nemo Outdoor is closed. Debug logging is activated by
running Nemo Outdoor in debug mode.

Page 55
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

When the Include device number in audio notification option is selected, the device number is
included at the beginning of the notification audio alert.

With the Load workspace on startup option you can define which workspace is loaded when
Nemo Outdoor is started.

With the Load hardware configuration on startup option you can define which hardware
configuration is loaded when Nemo Outdoor is started.

With the Start measurement list on startup option you can define which measurement list is
loaded and started when Nemo Outdoor is started.

When the Enable route history option is selected, a GPX (GPS Exchange Format) file is generated
from the measurement. A GPX file is also generated when loading playback files. GPX is a light-
weight XML data format for the interchange of GPS data (waypoints, routes, and tracks) between
applications and web services on the Internet.

5.3.2.2 User Interface Properties Measurement


By double-clicking the Measurement item in the Configuration Manager window you will access the
Measurement tab in the User Interface Properties dialog. Here you can make settings affecting
all measurements.

Page 56
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Filename defines the filename format. The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-month-
day hours-minutes-seconds, e.g., 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination of the items
below. For example, "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows: 06May31_1. The last
number (%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded that day. You can also create
custom filename templates. See chapter Creating Filename Templates.

%a Abbreviated weekday name

%A Full weekday name


%b Abbreviated month name

%B Full month name


%d Day of month as decimal number (01 31)

%H Hour in 24-hour format (00 23)


%I Hour in 12-hour format (01 12)

%j Day of year as decimal number (001 366)


%m Month as decimal number (01 12)

%M Minute as decimal number (00 59)


%n Sequence number (1 )

%N Sequence number (1 )
%p Current locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock

%S Second as decimal number (00 59)


%U Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day of week (00 53)

%w Weekday as decimal number (0 6; Sunday is 0)


%W Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day of week (00 53)

%y Year without century, as decimal number (00 99)


%Y Year with century, as decimal number
%z Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry
settings; no characters if time zone is unknown
%Z Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry
settings; no characters if time zone is unknown

With the Start scripts automatically option, you can order Nemo Outdoor to start executing the
script file when you click the Start button in the main window.

With the Force idle mode when stopping scripts option you can force the measurement mobile
to return to idle mode if the script is interrupted. When the option is set to No, the mobile will stay
in the current state when script is stopped. You can use this option to keep a GPRS mobile in active
state when toggling a script on and off.

Please note that it is recommended that with LTE devices this option is set to No. If
attach/ detach commands are needed frequently, for example, with script files it is
suggested that radio off/radio on commands are used instead of attach/detach.

Select the Stop measurement after script is finished option to force Nemo Outdoor to stop
recording after the script is finished.

Page 57
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

If you are making measurements with multiple devices and multiple scripts, select the
Synchronize script repeats option to force Nemo Outdoor to wait until all scripts for all devices
are finished before repeating the scripts.

Select the Prevent script stopping during connection establishment option to delay the script
stopping if any of the devices has a call or connection attempt ongoing.

With the Use time from GPS option you can order Nemo Outdoor to use GPS time at the start of
the measurement. During measurements, Nemo Outdoor will use PC time.

Select the Wait for GPS fix before starting measurement option if you would like to start
measuring only after there is a GPS fix.

Select the Enable automatic measurement pausing option to initiate an automatic pause when
GPS velocity goes under X km/h for X seconds or the GPS position is stale (ie. coordinates do not
change). Logging will be resumed automatically after the GPS velocity exceeds the user-specified
limit X.

GPS time offset value specifies the difference between GPS UTC time and local time. This offset is
used by handlers when GPS time synchronization is performed.

Select the Redial after dropped call option to automatically make a new call if a call is dropped
during measurements. Also define the time in seconds after which the call will be redialed.

Remove all forcing functions when device is started option deactivates all forcing functions
from the device when the device is started.

When the Use ETSI compatible call connection trigger option is set to Yes, Nemo Outdoor uses
the ETSI specification-based definition of the start and end time of a call.

Enable ETSI call timeout option changes the call attempt timeout to terminate at CAC 2 event.
By default, call attempt timeout terminates at CAC 1 event. See the Nemo File Format specification
(Help | Nemo File Format) for more information on the events.

With the Enable routing table modifications for local devices option users can enable and
disable routing table modification. The option is selected by default. Routing table modification
should be disabled only with single data testing. If routing table modification is disabled with multi
data testing, it can cause problems when several data connections are opened from one host
computer to terminals. All data connections to be established travel along one connection between
the host computer and the terminal, i.e. all connections are routed via one terminal, not via
different terminals and their interfaces. This distorts the test results.

Buffer size specifies the number of events stored in the history buffer of the user interface. The
size of the buffer affects how far back you can view a file during measurement.

Selecting the Start recording automatically when devices are started option enables Nemo
Outdoor to start recording automatically at device startup, and also when changing from offline
mode to online mode.

Selecting the Show report after measurement ends option will display a summary of all test
calls after the measurement is ended.

Selecting the Show send dialog before sending measurement to server option will display the
Send Measurement to Server dialog after the measurement is ended and before the log files are
sent to a server. See chapter Uploading measurement files to server for more information.

Page 58
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Selecting the Show 'Pause' dialog when measurement is paused option will display a message
when the measurement has been paused.

With the Show Stop Recording Query dialog before recording is stopped option selected, a
dialog appears at the end of the measurement to make sure you really want to stop recording.

Selecting the Start recording when incoming call is received option enables Nemo Outdoor to
start recording automatically when a test call is received.

Select the Compress measurement file(s) option to automatically compress the files below into a
single measurement archive (ZIP file). After the files are compressed, the original files are deleted.

measurement files (.nmf)

binary files (.nbl)

packet capture files (.pcap)

marker files (.mrk)

indoor map files (.tab and image)

BTS file (.nbf)

RF offset. In order to prevent measurements with missing/incorrect RF antenna connections, Nemo


Outdoor performs a check when measurement is started. The RXL/RSSI value of each measured
channel/carrier is read from each phone and scanner. The value from each channel is compared to
the highest value from all devices. If the measured value is less than X dB (=RF offset value) below
the highest value, a warning message is displayed to the user with the channel number and the
device name(s). In Remote mode, the offset value X can be set by Nemo Commander. If a warning
message is triggered by the field unit, it is shown in Nemo Commander.

Select the Include packet capture logs in measurement file upload option to send packet
capture logs during measurement file upload.

When the Enable scanner configuration monitor option is selected, Nemo Outdoor collects a list
of serving cell channels measured by test phones and compares it to a list of channels configured
for scanners connected to the system. If a measured channel is not configured for any scanner, an
error message is displayed.

When the Enable end to end calls when server connection fails option is enabled, the end-to-
end call control configuration allows the originate calls to be made from Nemo Server to a field unit
even if the receive incoming call command fails due to a lack of data connectivity between the
field unit and Nemo Server. This ensures that the number of MOC and MTC calls between the
handsets within the same script group are always same.

When the Group end to end call requests option is enabled, the script groups are used to group
the Nemo Server functions. Successful Nemo Server function request in one device triggers the call
action in all other devices of the same group.

When the Toggle terminal radio when phone is started option is enabled, Nemo Outdoor will
execute terminal radio off and terminal radio on commands whenever a phone is started.

Page 59
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

5.3.2.3 Creating filename templates


You can create templates for naming measurement log files. The template includes parameters
(tags) and a list of allowed values for each parameter. The template also specifies the filename
format which defines how the tags are used in the filename. The templates can be exported and
imported.

Click the Filename item on the User Interface Properties Measurement page and select
Create new filename or Edit current filename to open the Filename Editor. Click the Add
button to add a custom parameter.

Page 60
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

In the Parameter Editor dialog, type a name for the new parameter. Then click the New button
to add the possible values for the parameter. For example, add a parameter called city and then
add a list of cities where you conduct measurements. Finally click OK to return to the Filename
Editor.

The new parameter is listed in the Parameters table. You can add as many parameters as needed.
In the Filename field, define the filename format where you can now use your custom parameters.
For example, %City%m%d%Y. Below the Filename field you can see a preview of what the
filename will look like with the selected parameters.

Page 61
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

The new filename template can now be selected on the User Interface Properties
Measurement page in the Filename field.

When you start logging, you will be asked to select a value for the custom parameter. This value
will be used in the filename.

Page 62
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

5.3.2.4 User Interface Properties Paths

In the Paths tab you can define locations for different files. In the picture above, you can see the
default values. To change the default paths, click on the button and browse for a new location. In
the Default Map field, you can enter a map file that will be opened by default. A World.tab map file
is provided by Anite in the installation package. Local Files refers to the files that are used in FTP
testing. Report Files are the files created during timeslot testing. Default Color Set refers to the
color set that is opened by default on the map. For instructions on making new color sets, see
chapter Color Set Editor.

Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files for notifications In the Sounds field, select
C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Female if you want to use female sounds or C:\Nemo
Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Male if you want to use male sounds.

Note that BTS files and script files do not apply to scanners.

Page 63
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

5.3.2.5 User Interface Properties Presentation

In the Presentation tab you can define the format in which various parameter values are
presented. For example, to change the file size and buffer size unit in all data transfer configuration
dialogs, edit the Size setting in the User Interface Properties Presentation dialog.

Page 64
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

5.3.2.6 User Interface Properties Colors

In the Colors page you can define colors used for devices, graph lines, and map routes. The first
eight colors are reserved for devices. The other colors are used to draw graph lines and map routes.

To make new palettes, click the New button, type a name for the new palette, and define all the
colors. To change the palette, select a palette from the Color palette list.

Page 65
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

5.3.2.7 User Interface Properties Remote

Enable remote mode. When Remote mode is enabled, Nemo Outdoor will automatically perform a
maintenance session at startup. Also the manual Maintenance tool is activated in the Remote tab.

Define the Driver name and Driver phone number (optional).

5.3.3 Configuration Manager - Notifications

Page 66
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Notifications are graphical, textual, and audio notifications marking certain events. Nemo Outdoor
includes some premade notifications, but you can also add your own notifications. The notifications
come in handy when you are looking for certain events, parameters, or values in the measurement
file. Depending on your configuration, Nemo Outdoor will either play a sound or display a .png
image in a graph/map when the defined event occurs during measurements. A textual notification is
displayed in the Output window by default.

By double-clicking a notification, the Notifications window appears. There you can make changes to,
for example, sound files and icons associated with the notification.

5.3.3.1 Notification Configuration


To make your own notifications, select Settings | Notification Manager.

The dialog displays all existing notifications. From the table you can see the notification title and the
selected sound and bitmap file for each notification. Activate a sound and/or bitmap file for a
notification by selecting and clearing the options in the list.

Sound file defines an audio file for the selected notification. Browse a sound file in the field or use
the default file. Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files. In the User Interface Properties
Paths dialog, define which one you would like to use. Use the Play button to listen to the file. If
you want to attach your own sound files (.wav) to the notifications, you should create the sound
files and add them in the folder C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Male or C:\Nemo
Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Female.

Bitmap file defines a graphical notification for the selected notification. Browse a bitmap file in the
field or use the default file. The button will display a preview of the selected image. If you want to
attach your own bitmaps to the notifications, you should create the files and add them in the folder
C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Images.

Page 67
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Click the Add button to create new notifications in the Notification Criteria dialog.

Title defines a name for the notification.

Notify when these criteria are met table displays the criteria for the selected notification. You
can define a counter that specifies how many times the notification rules must match consecutively
before the notification is triggered.

Select the parameter that you want to use in the notification. Then define the Operator and Value
for the selected parameter and click Add to list to add the new criteria for the notification. You can
add several criteria for each notification. Finally click OK and the notification is saved and added in
the Notifications dialog where you can attach sound and bitmap files to the notification.

Select the Notify only once when criteria are met option when you want be notified about
certain events only once.

The notification is also available in the Measurement Properties | Notifications dialog where you
can activate the notification for a specific device. Click the Device notification settings button

in the Devices view. This will open the Measurement Properties, Notifications dialog.
Select the notifications you would like to use in the measurement and click OK.

Page 68
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

The table displays a list of notifications that can be activated for the selected device.

To make user-configurable notifications:


1. Open the Notifications dialog (Settings | Notification Manager) and click Add.

2. In the Notification Criteria dialog, define the notification criteria and click OK.

3. In the Notifications dialog, select the notification that you just created. Define sound and
bitmap files for the notification and activate them by selecting the options in the
notifications table.

4. Click OK to save the settings.

Page 69
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

5.3.4 Configuration Manager - Scripts

Note that you cannot use scripts with scanners.

Under the Scripts item you will find premade scripts and user-defined scripts. Scripts can be used
to perform measurements automatically instead of performing manual calls or data transfers. Select
the Scripts item to open a list of scripts in the Configuration Manager view. Double-click on any of
these scripts to open the Script Editor dialog. In order to select a script file to be used in a
measurement, click the Device script settings button in the Devices view.

Creating Script files is described in more detail in chapter Making script files.

5.3.5 Configuration Manager - Device configurations

Page 70
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Under Device Configurations, you will find a list of device configuration files (.hwc). A device
configuration contains information on devices and their measurement configurations. You can use
the device configurations to quickly start measurements with Nemo Outdoor without having to
detect and configure the measurement devices each time you start Nemo Outdoor.

You can load a .hwc file by selecting File | Open Device Configuration. Alternatively, you can
load a device configuration when you start Nemo Outdoor by selecting it in the Load device
Configuration dialog. To make new device configurations, add devices manually in Nemo Outdoor
and configure them. When everything is ready, select File | Save Device Configuration As and
type a name for the saved file. The new .hwc file will appear in the Configuration Manager, Device
Configurations folder.

To rename a device configuration, double-click the respective item in the Configuration Manager
and type a new name in the Rename HW Config dialog.

5.3.6 Configuration Manager - Devices

Under the Devices item are listed all the devices that you have connected to Nemo Outdoor. Note
that you can add a new device from the plus icon , and remove a device by selecting the device
and clicking on the minus icon . The table on the right displays information about the selected
device.

Each device (mobile, GPS, and scanner) has its own configuration dialog. Double-clicking on the
device will open the applicable device configuration dialog. These dialogs are presented next.

Page 71
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

5.3.6.1 Device configuration for mobiles and modems

The Label field allows you to give a label such as a comment or a name for the phone, and makes
it easier to identify devices during measurement and post processing. The label can be seen in the
Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback, and the information is also
stored in the log file header.

Trace port and Modem port selections are device-specific. Please refer to the Device
Configuration Guide for more detailed information.

Kodiak PTT port defines the COM port for a Kodiak PTT device. Please refer to chapter Kodiak
Push-to-Talk for more information.

Nemo Media Router option is used to enable Nemo Media Router. Select Automatic to enable the
option.

CS data connection option gives a list of all the circuit-switched data connections that have been
configured on your computer. If you are making CS data measurements, select a connection here.
See the Device Configuration Guide provided by Anite for detailed instructions for configuring test
devices.

PS data connection option gives a list of all the packet-switched data connections that have been
configured on your computer. If you are making PS data measurements, select a connection here.
See the Device Configuration Guide provided by Anite for detailed instructions for configuring test
devices.

Antenna gain and Cable loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the conversion
from dBm to dBuV/m. This parameter is needed only if you are using external antennas. If you are
using the internal antenna of each phone, leave these values blank.

Page 72
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Antenna Frequency Antenna Impedance VSWR 1 Max Polarization Cable Cable &
type range gain power loss connector
(dBd)

1140.27 824 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ 10 W Linear -0.55/ Mini Low


894/1710 specified vertical -0.82 Loss 2.5
1880/ freq. dB/m m, SMA
18502170 male
MHz

1140.26 890 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ 10 W Linear Mini Low


960/1850 specified vertical Loss 2.5
1990/ freq. m, SMA
17102170 male
MHz

Product Code Antenna Model Frequency Band Antenna Gain [dBi] Device

42101-06 MPLV1700 1700- 2700 MHz 4 dBi PCTEL


R&S

421010-04 PCTEL MLPV OP178H 698-2300 MHz PCTEL


R&S

421010-05 Mobile Mark Mag. 694-894 MHz 3 dBi Nemo FSR1


MGRM-WLF-1C10 & 1700- 2700 MHz

421010-07* Mobile Mark Mag. 750-1250 MHz 3 dBi on 750-1250 Nemo FSR1
MGRM-UMB-1C & 1650-2700 MHz MHz, 5 dBi on 1650- Test UEs
2700 MHz

421010-08 PCTEL OP178H 698-3000 MHz 3 dBi PCTEL/ Nemo


FSR1
Test UEs

421022-25 PCTEL OP278H 698-3800 MHz ~1 dBi on 900-2100 PCTEL/ Nemo


MHz FSR1
0dBi on 2300 MHz Test UEs
~1dbi on 2600 MHz
~1.5dBi on 3500
MHz

Page 73
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

The above examples can only be used with antennas received from Anite or Smarteq. If you are
using antennas from other antenna manufacturers, you will have to ask the antenna gain and cable
loss information from the manufacturer.

Voice quality algorithm defines which voice quality algorithms are used in voice quality
measurements.

If you select the Invex isolation module option, you can also make echo measurements. Select the
Enable echo measurement option to start logging the echo-related parameters. With the
Advanced echo OEM library provided by Opticom it is possible to measure echo from audio with
both PESQ and POLQA algorithms. Echo measurements require an additional license and it is
available with Nemo Invex using a handset isolation module. Echo measurements are not supported
with commercial sound cards, such as, Terratec DMX6 Fire or Maya44.

Select the Nemo audio module option to use the Nemo audio module for voice quality
measurements. You can define the port where the Nemo voice quality unit is connected in the drop-
down menu.

Select the Sound card channel option to use the USB sound card for voice quality measurements.
Select the applicable sound card channel in the drop-down menu.

Select the Invex isolation module option to use a terminal with a Nemo Invex isolation module
for voice quality measurements.

Select the Nemo Media Router option to use a terminal with Nemo Media Router for voice quality
measurements.

Page 74
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Select the VoIP only option to make voice quality measurements (POLQA) over a VoIP connection.
If you select this option make the appropriate settings in the VoIP Call Configuration dialog (see
VoIP calls).

Select Disabled when you do not wish to carry out voice quality measurements.

Video quality algorithm defines which algorithms are used in video streaming quality
measurements. For more information, see chapter Streaming video quality testing.

After you have configured the device, click the Apply button to check that the device is working
properly. To exit the dialog, click OK.

Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties dialog
where you can make device-specific measurement settings. You can also enter the Measurement
Properties dialog by clicking the Measurement Settings button in the Devices view.

5.3.6.2 Device configuration for scanners

In the Label field you can define a suitable label for the device, for example, a name or a usage
purpose, making it easier to identify the device during measurement and post processing. The label
can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback, and the
information is also stored in the log file header.

Port refers to the port to which the scanner is connected.

Baud rate refers to the communication speed.

Page 75
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Antenna gain and Cable loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the conversion
from dBm to dBuV/m. This parameter is needed only if you are using external antennas. If you are
using the internal antenna of each phone, leave these values blank.

Antenna Frequency Antenna Impedance VSWR 1 Max Polarization Cable Cable &
type range gain power loss connector
(dBd)

1140.27 824 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ 10 W Linear -0.55/ Mini Low


894/1710 specifie vertical -0.82 Loss 2.5
1880/ d freq. dB/m m, SMA
18502170 male
MHz

1140.26 890 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ 10 W Linear Mini Low


960/1850 specifie vertical Loss 2.5
1990/ d freq. m, SMA
17102170 male
MHz

The above examples can only be used with antennas received from Anite or Smarteq. If you are
using antennas from other antenna manufacturers, you will have to ask the antenna gain and cable
loss information from the manufacturer.

Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties dialog
where you can make device-specific measurement settings.

After you have configured the device, click the Apply button to check that the device is working
properly. To exit the dialog, click OK.

5.3.6.3 Device configuration for GPS receivers

In the Label field you can define a label for the GPS device, for example, a name or a usage
purpose, making it easier to identify devices during measurement and post processing. The label
can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback, and the
information is also stored in the log file header.

Serial port refers to the port to which the GPS receiver is connected.

Page 76
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Baud rate refers to the communication speed. The available values are 1200, 2400, 4800, and
9600.

Data bits, Parity and Stop bits are other communication-related parameters. The available values
for Data bits are 5, 6, 7, and 8, the options for Parity are Even, None, and Odd. The default value
for Stop bits is 1. You should set these values the same as in your GPS. Check your GPS receiver
documentation.

After you have configured the device, click the Apply button to check that the device is working
properly. To exit the dialog, click OK.

5.3.7 Configuration Manager - View groups

Under the View Groups item are listed all the view groups that are currently loaded. View groups
are sets of windows that are open at the same time. You can add a new view group from the plus
icon , and remove a view group by selecting the item and clicking on the minus icon . When you
select a view group in the Configuration Manager, the right-hand panel displays the views that are
saved in the view group. You can define properties for each view by double-clicking the view name.

See chapter The ribbon contains all Nemo Outdoor commands. The commands are arranged in tabs.

Under the Nemo Outdoor button, you will find more commands.

Page 77
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

View groups for more information.

Page 78
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

5.3.8 Configuration Manager - Workspaces

Under the Workspaces item are listed all the workspace that are currently loaded. Workspaces are
sets of view groups that are open at the same time. You can edit and move individual views from
one view group to another and individual view groups from one workspace to another. When you
select an individual view group, the right-hand panel displays the views that are saved in the view
group. It is also possible to create new view groups.

Page 79
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

5.4 Measurement Properties dialog


The Measurement Properties dialog contains several pages and the contents depend on the device
type (mobile or scanner), on the device model, and on the technologies supported by the device.

5.4.1 Measurement Properties General

Network name field can be used for stating the friendly name for the network (operator) that
Nemo Outdoor measures with the respective test mobile. Note that you should enter the name
yourself, as Nemo Outdoor does not recognize the network that each mobile is using. The network
name is presented in the output files and helps you to recognize which network you have been
monitoring.

BTS file defines the base station file that will be displayed on the map. If you have a GPS receiver
connected to the system, you can view the measurement vehicle on the map and a line will be
drawn from the measurement vehicle to the active base station. Click the button to browse for a
BTS file (.nbf or .csv).

BTS template file defines how customer-specific BTS data is imported into Nemo Outdoor. Please
refer to chapter Importing BTS data for more information.

Cell whitelist file is a feature needed in emergency call testing. It specifies a list of cells from
which emergency call testing is possible.

Subscriber number can be entered manually in case the information cannot be read from the
device with AT-commands.

Page 80
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

5.4.2 Measurement Properties Measurement


On the Measurement Properties Measurement page you can define various measurement-related
settings. For example, you can define what services will be tested, which data protocols are used,
and whether layer messages are logged or not. Note that the selection is device-specific.

5.4.2.1 Services
Voice Call opens the Voice Call dialog.

DTMF characters field can be used to send DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency) tones during a voice
call.

Short Messaging Service. See chapter SMS testing for more information.

USSD Message button opens the USSD Testing dialog. See chapter USSD testing for more
information on USSD testing.

Multimedia Messaging Service button opens the Packet Session Settings, MMS dialog. See
chapter MMS testing for more information on MMS testing.

Circuit-Switched Data Call opens the Data Call Properties dialog.

Video Call button opens the Video Call Properties dialog. See chapter Making video calls for
more information.

Packet Session opens the Packet session settings dialog.

Supported Data Protocols opens a list of available data protocols. Clicking the field of a data
protocol will open a dialog for configuring the selected data protocol.

SIP Server option opens the SIP server dialog. See chapter VoIP calls for more information.

Page 81
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

VoIP Call option opens the VoIP call dialog. See chapter VoIP calls for more information.

Custom AT Commands offers the possibility to run custom AT commands with certain test
terminals. The available commands are device-specific. Type in the AT command and click Send
Command. The AT commands and responses are saved in the measurement file.

Incoming call option opens the Incoming Call Configuration dialog. See chapter Receive call
for more information.

5.4.2.2 Measurement options


Under Measurement Options you can enable and disable various measurement options, such as
layer messages. If you disable some of the options, the disabled messages will not be recorded in
the measurement file. This will decrease output file size. The selection depends on the
measurement device used. These options are also accessible through the Devices view.

When the EVRC MOS compensation option is enabled, the Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ)
tool is biased against the Enhanced Variable Rate Codec (EVRC) used in CDMA networks and other
codecs in this family (EVRC-B and EVRC-WB). MOS value is incremented by 0.318MOS.

Page 82
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Incoming call mode defines how incoming calls are handled. The options are answer, reject, and
ignore. You can also define a delay (in seconds) when the Answer option is selected.

With Qualcomm-based terminals there are several different Voice call methods. Voice call method
is device specific. Trace interface 2 method should be used with MultiRAB testing. When a voice call
is terminated, the PS data connection might be released with UEs using the Trace interface call
method to make voice calls. In such a case, it is recommended to use the Trace interface 2 call
method. Please check the Device Configuration Guide or release note for device-specific
information.

With Qualcomm-based terminals there is a number of different Video call methods and the
correct method must be selected to be able to make video call testing.

With the Select AMR codecs option, you can force a device to use a certain AMR codec mode. For
example, when a UE is forced to the WCDMA AMR WB codec, it can freely use any WB AMR codec
from 6.6 kbps to 23.85 kbps.

Note that the Enable RLC Data messages item should not be enabled with data
connections 384kbit/s or higher as this may cause instability in the measurement
terminal.

To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet
decoding function prior to performing data measurements. Select Full or Partial in the
Enable IP Capture field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. This
file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and
decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.

5.4.2.3 Measurement settings


With the Force detach when entering idle mode option selected, a GPRS detach is forced when
the measurement device enters idle mode.

Enable diagnostic data logging option enables/disables Qualcomm raw packet logging. When
diagnostics data logging is enabled, you can select individual Qualcomm trace messages to be
stored in a separate binary file (.NBL). Both NBL and NMF files can be opened and played back with
Nemo Outdoor and Qualcomm raw data messages can be fully decoced in the grid view for further
analysis. This functionality requires the Diagnostics Data Logging option OD0700-00.

Page 83
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Due to a high sample rate, the diagnostic data logging option should not be activated
during a normal drive test.

Currently, the following diagnostic messages are available:

DCI Information report

DL Transport block

LL1 PUSCH Tx Report

LTE MAC UL Transport block

MAC UL transport block

MAC UL Tx stat

PDCP UL stat

PUCCH TX report

RLC DL ALL PDU

LTE ML1 random access request (MSG1) report

LTE ML1 random access response (MSG2) report

LTE ML1 UE identification message (MSG3) report

LTE ML1 contention resolution message (MSG4) report

LTE RLC DL AM All PDU

LTE RLC UL AM All PDU

LTE ML1 PDCCH-PHICH indication report

LTE ML1 uplink packet build indication

LTE ML1 PDSCH stat indication

LTE LL1 PUCCH CSF Log

LTE LL1 PUSCH CSF log

LTE LL1 PDSCH decoding results

Page 84
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

5.4.3 Measurement Properties Frequency scanning with mobiles


Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the
terminal supports frequency scanning.

Enable frequency scanning option must be selected to activate frequency scanning for the
mobile.

The Top-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest channels in GSM. With
Top-N scanning it is possible to get Top-N channel results for each band, e.g. for EGSM, GSM900
and GSM1800. The benefits also include the possibility to benchmark different operators.

Selecting the BSIC decoding option displays BSIC value in a measurement window. BSIC
threshold defines the minimum BSIC level that the scanner reports.

When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected, the missing neighbor information event
(NMISS) is written in the log file. You can view the missing neighbor information, for example, in a
grid view.

Page 85
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

If you select BSIC decoding or Missing neighbor detection, click the Select Channels button
to define the channels to be scanned.

Select the Show channels as frequencies option to view the channels in MHz.

In the Band drop-down menu you can select a band from which to view channels from in the
Available view. If you select All in the Band drop-down menu, channels from all bands will be
viewed. You can also select one band at a time and add the bands you want to scan.

The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning. To add channels to
the Selected list, click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply
double-click a channel to add it to the Selected list. To select all available channels for scanning,
click the Add All button. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers
in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add. If all bands are selected, you have the
possibility to select Remove All | ... items from every band. Alternatively, if only one band is
selected you can remove only items from the current band through Remove All | ...items from
current band.

Page 86
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

If you select the Top-N option, click the Top-N Configuration button to select channels.

In the Top-N Configuration dialog you can set the Start and Stop ARFCN range between which
the Top-N channels are recorded. Define the number of strongest channels to be searched in the
Top-N field. The maximum number of Top-N channels is 32. You can click on the Clear all button to
clear the table.

Page 87
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

5.4.4 Measurement Properties Pilot scanning with mobiles


Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the
terminal supports pilot scanning.

The Enable pilot scanning option must be selected to activate pilot scanning for the mobile.

Select a value for the CPICH RSCP threshold field. The device will only report cells with CPICH
RSCP above the set value.

The Top-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest pilots in UMTS. With Top-
N scanning it is possible to get Top-N channel results for each band. The benefits also include the
possibility to benchmark different operators.

When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected, the missing neighbor information event
(NMISS) is written in the log file. You can view the missing neighbor information, for example, in a
grid view.

Click the Top-N Configuration button to enter the Select Channels dialog.

Page 88
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

5.4.5 Measurement Properties Frequency, pilot, and spectrum scanning with


scanners
Please refer to the separate scanner guides, Nemo FSR1 User Manual and Nemo Scanner Guide,
included in the product package.

5.4.6 Measurement Properties - Script


In order to select a script file to be used in a measurement, click the Device Script Settings
button

in the Devices window.

In the Script File field, browse the script file that you want to use. There are some premade script
files available but you can also create your own in the Script Editor (see chapter Making script
files).

With Nemo Outdoor you can define multiple script synchronization groups. The scripts in the same
group are synchronized with each other. Devices can be assigned for certain script groups. By
default the script group is selected as <None>, but the user can also create new script groups by
selecting <New group> in the Script group drop-down menu, and typing the name of the new
script group in the field. A script group can be also saved with a specific name. To be able to use
script groups, the Synchronize script repeats option must be selected in the User Interface
Properties (see User Interface Properties Measurement).

When a script group is selected as <None>, but Synchronize script repeats option is selected, all
script files that belong to the same <None> group are synchronized.

Page 89
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Script groups can be used, e.g., with Nemo Outdoor multi configuration including two voice quality
terminals and two USB modems performing PS data transfers simultaneously. For example, script
files used with voice quality terminals belong to the same script group, and their script files are
synchronized with one another, whereas the PS data scripts belong to the second script group. The
script synchronization settings need to be configured separately for each device.

Page 90
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6 DURING MEASUREMENTS

When Nemo Outdoor is performing the user defined test measurement, you can view the process in
a number of graphs, grids, and maps. The graph and grid windows are fully user configurable. In
the following chapters, the most common tasks are presented in more detail and some examples
are given to illustrate their use. If you have any problems in starting the measurements, see
chapter Troubleshooting.

Page 91
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.1 Textual notes


It is possible to add textual notes at points of interest during measurements. Click the Add Textual
Note button in the toolbar. Note that you need to start recording before the button is activated.

You can either type the note in the field or select a predefined text and click OK. To save new
predefined notes, type in the text, click the arrow next to the OK button and select Add
predefined text. Next time the text will be available in the drop-down menu at the top.

The textual notes can be viewed during playback, for example, in an events grid.

6.2 Nemo Commander remote control option for Nemo Outdoor/


Invex
Nemo Outdoor measurement units can be remotely configured and controlled with Nemo
Commander. This requires the Remote option in Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex and the Nemo
Commander SW. All the same user interface functionalities are available in remote mode as in
normal mode. For more information on the Nemo Commander SW, please refer to the Nemo
Commander user manual.

In order to use TeamViewer for controlling the Nemo Outdoor units, the TeamViewer application
must be installed on the Nemo Outdoor laptop. Please refer to the Nemo Commander user manual
for more information.

To configure the Remote mode, select Remote | Settings.

Note that if the Remote tab does not appear in the ribbon, your Nemo Outdoor license
does not have the Remote option (product code OD0700-01).

On the User Interface Properties Remote page, select Yes for Enable remote mode. When
Remote mode is enabled, Nemo Outdoor will automatically perform a maintenance session at
startup. Also the manual Maintenance tool is activated in the Remote tab.

Page 92
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.2.1 Nemo Commander server options


FTP protocol is used to transfer data between field units and Nemo Commander. Commander Server
options define the server (FTP) address, username, and password.

Add the FTP server host name or IP address.

Leave Username, Remote folder, and Password fields empty. This information is
generated by the system and the fields are updated after the initial maintenance session.

Use secure protocol: Select in case SFTP protocols is used in the server

Use passive mode: With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the
firewall does not block the connection

6.2.2 Initial field unit configuration


1. Build the Nemo Outdoor HW configuration, in other words, connect the measurement
devices (phones, USB modems, and scanners) to the Nemo Outdoor laptop.

2. A dedicated PS data connection (e.g. 3G/4G USB modem or smartphone, active only during
maintenance sessions) is required to establish the connection between Nemo Outdoor and
Nemo Commander. Connect the device to the Nemo Outdoor laptop and install the
necessary drivers. Do not add the device to Nemo Outdoor as it will not be used as a
measurement device.

3. Synchronize date and time settings between the Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Commander
computers.

4. Enable the Remote mode on the Nemo Outdoor User Interface Properties Remote
page and define the Commander Server settings.

5. Select Maintenance from the Remote tab.

Page 93
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

The Nemo Outdoor unit connects and registers to Nemo Commander.

The HW configuration of the Nemo Outdoor unit is uploaded to Nemo Commander.

Step 5, Maintenance, must be repeated every time the HW configuration changes.

6.2.3 Measurement workflow


1. Nemo Commander: Define measurement sessions for the field unit(s)

Scripts for each device

Session start/stop time

2. Nemo Outdoor: Power on laptop and all test devices

Nemo Outdoor starts automatically

Status report is uploaded to Nemo Commander

Measurement session is downloaded from Nemo Commander

Measurements are started automatically according to the downloaded configuration

Periodic status reports are sent to Nemo Commander (configured in Nemo Commander)

3. Nemo Commander: Verify the HW configuration from latest status report (optional)

If incorrect, contact driver

4. Nemo Outdoor: End measurements

Measurements are stopped at the scheduled time

Log files and status reports are uploaded to Nemo Commander

6.2.4 Events reported by Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex to Nemo Commander


The following measurement events are reported by Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Invex to Nemo
Commander.

Status events:

Start measurement

Stop measurement

GSP fix lost

Page 94
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

GSP fix acquired

Device responding

Device power off request

Device restart

High voltage shutdown

Battery operation

Battery shutdown

Errors:

Start measurement failed

Device not responding

Warnings:

Low voltage

High voltage

Battery voltage low

6.3 Making scanning measurements


Please refer to the Nemo FSR1 user manual or Nemo Scanner Guide for information on scanner
measurements.

6.4 Making voice calls


To make voice calls:
1. In the Measurement Properties, Measurement page (see Measurement Properties
Measurement), insert the phone number that you wish to use in the test call in the Voice
Call field. Click OK.
2. Select Start Voice Call from the Measurement Control menu in Devices view or run a
script.

Note that after you have activated the script, you cannot control the measurement
manually until the script is finished or you stop the script manually.

Page 95
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

3. When you wish to finish the call in manual mode, select Stop Voice Call from the
Measurement Control menu in Devices view. If you are running a script, wait until the
script is finished.

Call type in the call attempt event (CAA) is written as a voice call, not VoLTE or WLAN
IMS voice call when a call is generated via Nemo Outdoor user interface. This is because
the call type is unknown at the time of the call attempt. Call type in the call connection
event (CAC) should be observed.

With networks using encryption, it is required to perform radio off/ radio on for the
VoLTE/ VoWifi/ ViWifi and wait ~40 seconds. During this time, SIP server registering is
shown in the user interface even if the UE is already registered. After this, measurements
can proceed normally.

During recording, the user cannot enable WLAN measurements. WLAN measurement
needs to be enabled before starting measurement. In this case, the user needs to enable
WLAN from the device UI manually.

When enabling WLAN measurement from Nemo Outdoor, a notification Turning on Wi-Fi
will turn off USB Tethering. Continue? is shown in device UI. WLAN will not be activated
before user responds to the dialog. This dialog will not affect the functionality, the
connection between NMR and Nemo Outdoor stays active.

If the device is in Airplane Mode and WLAN is activated, device handler starting may fail.

SIP server registration type is not updated until the next SIPREGA/SIPREGC events are
written. Information is also not updated with WLAN IMS voice -> LTE IMS voice and LTE
IMS voice -> WLAN IMS voice events

If WLAN is disconnected/disabled, WLAN IMS SIP server registered status stays visible in
Nemo Outdoor UI

Page 96
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.4.1 Voice Call Configuration


Voice call settings are needed to establish the voice calls and to make voice quality measurements.
Click the Voice Call button in the Measurement Properties, Measurement dialog and the Voice
Call Configuration dialog will be opened.

Phone number defines the number to be called. It must be a valid phone number. The number
must be such that the line stays open for a user-defined time and some speech or sound is
transferred on the line. The Number field can contain up to 17 characters.

Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds.

Fixed: The duration timer is started from the channel assignment. The range of duration
values is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds. Note that the maximum value of this parameter is
the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter.

Random: In addition to a fixed call duration, you can specify a random call duration by
specifying the minimum and maximum values in seconds. The call duration will be randomly
selected between the specified values during measurements.

Page 97
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. If the call
attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel, the call
attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the Call Attempt
Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds.

When Request voice call callback is selected, the application sends callback command to Nemo
Server using DTMF tones. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally DTMF tones do
not affect to MOS score. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone lines (PSTN) user must
define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo Server manager application. If
ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are selected to be sent also caller id to
Nemo server, callback number is recognized automatically. Note that this functionality requires
Nemo Server version 2.5.0 or later.

When Wait for call connection option is selected, a call script will move on to the next command
after receiving the CAA event after a voice call has been made. When the option is not selected, the
script will move on to the next command after a traffic channel is allocated (CAC1 event is
received).

Select the Enable end-to-end call option to activate voice call synchronization between two
devices connected to the same Nemo Outdoor system or between a device and Nemo Server.

Select the Nemo Server option to enable voice call synchronization between a device and Nemo
Server. Nemo Server Settings button opens the HTTPS Options dialog where you can define
connection settings.

Select the Local device options to activate end-to-end voice calls between two devices connected
to the same Nemo Outdoor system.

Own number defines the A-party phone number.

Call reception timeout defines the max. time to receive the incoming call. If call is not received
within the timeout, call attempt failure with the cause Incoming call not received is written to the
log file.

Select the Enable voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the voice
quality settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements.

Audio mode defines which party, A or B, starts the audio transmission. In Normal mode, the caller
party starts with audio transmission and in Reverse mode the caller starts with audio reception.

Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is
compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the samples are of 8KHz
sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than six seconds in length. With the
Terratec sound card, sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample length
a maximum of 30 seconds. For ECHO measurements, use one of the following samples: 10s.wav,
4s_m.wav, 8s.wav, ru_6s.wav, and ru_6s_wb.wav.

Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files.

Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received
audio sample files. If you leave this field empty, the received audio files are not stored. When a
prefix is defined, Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time.wav where prefix
is the user-defined prefix, mos the voice quality score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision
but without decimal point, date in DDMMYYYY format, and time in HHMMSS format. For example:
terminal1_34_15112004_143045.wav.

Page 98
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved.
The threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. The default threshold
value is 5, which means that all samples are saved.

Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through the
Script Editor. See chapter Making script files for more information on making scripts.

Note that with voice quality measurements when calling the Nemo audio server, the
delay time between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least
10 seconds.

CDMA specific settings, Service option defines the service option used for the test call. Note
that the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA mobile.

Tetra specific - Call type (enabled only for TETRA devices) defines what kind of calls will be
made. There are five different options in TETRA networks: duplex, semiduplex, group, direct, and
PSTN.

Duplex: Normal call between two terminals; both parties can speak at the same time

Semiduplex: Call between two terminals, but only one party can speak at a time by
pressing the PTT (Press-to-Talk) button

Group: Call from one terminal to a group; all terminals having that group active can listen,
and by pressing the PTT button, also speak

Direct: Call between terminals which bypasses the network, by means of the PTT button

PSTN: Call from terminal to fixed line or to another cellular mobile

Page 99
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.4.2 End-to-end call instructions


In the User Interface Properties Measurement dialog, set option Use ETSI compatible call
connection trigger to Yes. With this option, the call duration will be calculated from Alerting to
Call disconnected. It corresponds better to the call duration seen by the server.

Set option Enable end to end calls when server connection fails to Yes. With this option Nemo
Outdoor will perform the MO call, even if HTTP commands to the server would fail.

6.4.2.1 Nemo Outdoor script settings

1. When end-to-end call synchronization is used, all the devices must have the same group ID,
which can be set in device script settings as the Script group.

Page 100
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

2. Devices in the same script group must use the same script files. Only the line number and
the own number can be different between scripts on different devices. Other call settings
must be the same. Otherwise, the server will not be able to predict the behavior of the
different terminals in the group correctly.

It is mandatory to set a Wait for script synchronization command before the MO or MT


calls. Always use wait commands between call commands. The minimum wait time
should be 10 sec.

Picture 1: Mobile originated call settings (make a voice call)

Page 101
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Picture 2: Incoming call setting (receive call)

3. Own number (subscriber telephone number) must be defined in both Make a voice call
and Receive call commands.

4. Server line (Nemo Server phone number) must be defined in the Receive call command.

5. Only end-to-end call settings should be defined. For example, the Request voice call
callback in Voice Call Configuration must be set to No.

Picture 3: Nemo e2e server settings

Page 102
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6. Nemo Server settings are global settings that are written in the PC registry. This means that
these settings are not transferred within a script file. If the script files are copied from a
Control PC to another user, these settings must be written again.

6.4.2.2 Nemo Server configuration


1. Channel callback settings must be set to off.

2. Configure all server channels with correct RemoteNumbers and LineNumbers before making
any end-to-end commands.

3. Restart the VQD service after channel configuration is done and each time the configuration
is changed.

4. If measurements are stopped and restarted, wait for 200 seconds between the changes so
that the possibly running server side timers are finished before the new test begins.

5. If grouping is changed so that, for example, one handset is removed from the script group,
change the group name. Otherwise the grouping stays the same on the server side also for
channels that were part of the last group. Alternatively, configure the removed handset with
an empty group and let it command the server once to clear the group from that channel.

6. Make a configuration command (e.g. one test call cycle) on good RF conditions.

NOTE! Nemo Server side grouping stays valid until automatic service restart happens at
3:00 am. A new configuration command executed by the field unit is required on daily
basis. Also when the VQD service is stopped or started or when the Nemo Server is shut
down or rebooted.

6.4.2.3 Starting a measurement and running a script


It is important, that after starting a measurement, the HTTP commands go through from all the
terminals to the server at least once. This enables the server to synchronize and detect all the
devices belonging to the same group.

When changing from synchronized measurements to non-synchronized or individual


tests, the field user has to wait at least until the server-side parameter FileCloseTimeout
(seconds) has been elapsed from the end of the last call. This is because the server
purges the channel grouping only after the measurement file is closed for all group
channels. By default the FileCloseTimeout is 200 seconds.

6.4.2.4 Configuring manual end-to-end voice calls


With Nemo Outdoor it is possible to make end-to-end voice call testing between two devices
connected to the same Nemo Outdoor system.

1. Add two phones to Nemo Outdoor: Device A and Device B

2. Open the Voice Call Properties for Device A by double-clicking the Voice Call item in the
Devices view.

Page 103
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

3. Enter Device B phone number in the Number field.

4. Select the Enable end-to-end call option.

5. Select the Local device option and select Device B from the list. Click OK.

6. You can now start making voice calls from Device A to Device B.

Page 104
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.4.2.5 HTTPS Options dialog


In the HTTPS Options dialog you can define the connection settings for the Nemo Server.

Define the server address, autouser (username), and password and the name of the Remote
folder, i.e. folder in which the measurement files are sent on the server.

Select the Use secure protocol option to send the measurement files using HTTPS protocol.

Select the Use passive mode option to send the measurement files using passive mode.

When the Move local files to Sent folder after upload option is selected, the measurement
files are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo Tools directory on your computer after the
transfer. You can also change this default destination in User Interface Properties | Paths |
Measurements.

The file transfer can be performed using a default Internet connection, via a user-selected data
connection, or using mobile broadband.

When you select the Use a Proxy Server option, the Proxy address, Username and Password
fields will become active.

With the Test connection tool you can

6.4.3 Push-to-Talk (PTT) testing


Nemo Outdoor supports QChat (developed by Qualcomm) and Kodiak Push-to-Talk (PTT)
technologies. QChat Push-to-Talk (PTT) calls must be performed using the keypad of the phone
when used with Nemo Outdoor. Kodiak PTT calls can be made using UI commands in Nemo
Outdoor.

Page 105
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Normal call events and statistics are written when attempting or ending PTT calls. Different states of
PTT calls, such as idle, getting ready to receive, receiving, transmitting are written to VCHI event.
Please see the file format specification for further information. RTP packets are recorded and
decoded with Nemo Outdoor. Qchat and Kodiak PTT are optional features in Nemo Outdoor and
require a license option.

6.4.3.1 Kodiak Push-to-Talk


Kodiak PTT devices are connected with Nemo Outdoor as Bluetooth devices. After the device has
been paired with the laptop, check the COM port number from the Windows Bluetooth Devices
dialog.

Start Nemo Outdoor and add the device (Add New Device | Phone | Qualcomm). In the Device
Configuration dialog, select the COM port assigned for your device in the Kodiak PTT port field and
click OK.

In the Measurement Properties Measurement page, double-click the Kodiak PTT call item to open
the Kodiak Call Configuration dialog.

Page 106
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Call type defines what kind of call will be made. The options are one to one, one to many, and
group call.

Recipients defines to whom the call is made. The recipients are selected from the contact list of
the Kodiak application and are defined as index numbers. For example, if you would like to make a
call to the first contact on the contact list, enter 0. If the selected call type is one to many, define
several recipients and separate the index numbers with semicolons. If the selected call type is
group call, select the recipient from the group contact list of the Kodiak application and again, use
the index number.

After the call type and recipients have been defined, select Register Kodiak Server to login to the
Kodiak server.

After you have registered to the Kodiak server you can start a Kodiak call.

Page 107
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Once the Kodiak call has been established, select Press PTT Button/Release PTT Button.

From Events grids, you can observe the Kodiak call events.

Page 108
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

In addition to calls, you can send IPAs. Go to Measurement Properties Measurement and double-
click the Instant Personal Alert item. Define the recipient (only one at a time) and click Send
Message.

6.5 Voice quality measurements


Nemo Outdoor supports mobile-to-mobile and mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile voice quality
measurements. Please refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide document for complete instructions on
setting up and making voice quality measurements.

Voice quality testing is not supported with VoWiFi and ViWiFi measurements at the
moment.

Page 109
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.6 Making video calls


Terminals verified by Anite Network Testing support video calls. However, video call
testing with Android-based devices is not supported.

Click the Video Call button in the Measurement Properties, Measurement dialog to access the
Video Call Properties dialog. These settings are needed for making video calls.

Note that the Qualcomm IMS IR.94 VoLTE option is required for video over LTE testing.

Number defines the number where the video call will be made.

When Request voice call callback is selected, the application sends callback command to Nemo
Server using DTMF tones. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally DTMF tones do
not affect to MOS score. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone lines (PSTN) user must
define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo Server manager application. If
ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are selected to be sent also caller id to
Nemo server, callback number is recognized automatically. Note that this functionality requires
Nemo Server version 2.5.0 or later.

Select the Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the voice quality
settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements.

Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is
compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the samples are of 8KHz
sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than ten seconds in length. With the
Terratec sound card, sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample length
a maximum of 30 seconds.

Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files.

Page 110
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received
audio sample files. If you leave this field empty, the received audio files are not stored. When a
prefix is defined, Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time.wav where prefix
is the user-defined prefix, mos the voice quality score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision
but without decimal point, date in DDMMYYYY format, and time in HHMMSS format. For example:
terminal1_34_15112004_143045.wav.

Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved.
The threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. The default threshold
value is 5, which means that all samples are saved.

Note that the Script Settings view is activated only if you access this dialog through the
Script Editor. See chapter Making script files for more information on making scripts.

Note that with voice quality measurements when calling Nemo Server, the delay time
between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least 10 seconds.

CDMA specific settings, Service option defines the service option used for the test call. Note
that the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA mobile.

Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. The duration timer is started from
the channel assignment. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds. Note that
the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay
Between Call Attempts parameter.

Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. If the call
attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel, the call
attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the Call Attempt
Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds.

Note that video calls with the generic Qualcomm handler require some further settings to
be made prior to making the call. Go to Measurement Properties | Measurement, and
select the applicable video call method for the measurement from the drop-down menu.

Select the method based on the list below, or try each Method separately and select the one that
works. The selected method is saved to the device configuration file.

Method 1 - Samsung Z105

Method 2 - Samsung Z107

Method 3 - Samsung Z140, Samsung Z500, Samsung P920, Samsung Z560, Samsung
ZX20

Method 4 - Samsung ZV10

Method 5 - Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile

Method 6 - Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile

Method 7 - LG KU950 , LG KF700

Method 8 - Samsung U800 (always required to first make a video call using the terminal
keypad)

Method 9 - Samsung G800

Method 10 - Not used

Page 111
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

To make video calls:


1. In the Measurement Properties, Configuration dialog, insert the phone number that you
wish to use in the test call in the Video Number field. Click OK.

2. Select Make Video Call from the Measurement Control menu in the Devices view or run
a script.

Note that after you have activated the script, you cannot control the measurement
manually until the script is finished or you stop the script manually.

3. When you wish to finish the call in manual mode, select Stop Video Call. If you are
running a script, wait until the script is finished.

Note! Video call testing is supported on any video call capable terminal based on
Qualcomm chipset. However, the user must remember to select the correct method from
Measurement Properties | Measurement prior to making the call. The selected method is
saved to the device configuration file.

6.7 Data transfers


With mobiles supporting CS and PS data, you can make data transfers. In Nemo Outdoor, you have
several data protocol options for making data transfers.

The Nemo Outdoor Multi system enables multiple simultaneous data connections. Each data transfer
needs to be set up and configured individually.

Multiple concurrent data transfers can be made manually or with scripts. To make multiple
concurrent data transfers manually, go in online mode and activate a packet session. Then select
Start New Data Transfer and the desired protocol.

Page 112
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet
decoding function (Measurement Properties - Measurement) prior to performing data
measurements. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. A separate .pcap-file
will be generated for the measurement, and this file needs to accompany the
measurement file under the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture
information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.

6.7.1 Configuring the data connection


Before you can start making data transfers you need to define the actual connection that
is used for the transfer. The setup is different for CS and PS data transfers.

If you are making CS data transfers, see chapter Data Call Properties. If you are making PS data
transfers, see chapter Packet Session Settings.

6.7.1.1 Data Call Properties dialog


Data Call properties are needed to establish the circuit-switched data connection. Open the Data
Call Properties dialog by double-clicking the Circuit-Switched Data Call item in the Devices view.

There are separate views for GSM, UMTS, and CDMA. The parameters are the same. The UMTS and
CDMA views just have fewer parameters.

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server
(number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

Number defines the number of the server.

Username refers to the server username.

Password refers to the server password.

Transparent mode defines whether transparent or non-transparent mode is used in the CS data
call.

Compression defines if no compression or v.42bis compression is used.

Page 113
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Modem type refers to the modem type that the server is using. The alternatives are Analog (v.34)
and ISDN (v.110 and v.120).

Timeslots (UL/DL) defines the number of timeslots for each direction.

Coding defines the coding scheme used in the air interface.

Enable automatic link adaptation option allows you to disable and enable Automatic Link
Adaptation (ALA). The ALA technology controls power levels and automatically selects the best
channel coding.

6.7.1.2 Packet session settings


Packet session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. Double-click
the Packet Session item in the Devices view to access the Packet Session Settings dialog.

All the parameters in this dialog are operator specific. You must select the correct parameters to
make the packet transfer function. Contact the operator of the network that you are measuring.

Page 114
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.7.1.3 TCP/UDP Protocol Configuration (Iperf)


Note that it is required that Nemo Server is used with Iperf testing as the original Iperf
service is slightly modified for optimal performance.

Open the TCP/UDP Protocol Configuration dialogs by double-clicking the TCP (IPerf) and UDP
(IPerf) items in the Devices view.

Host name is the IP address used in Nemo Server. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling over
an IPv4 connection.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, each
connection must have its own IP address.

Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the
same IP address can be used.

Note that Firewall should be turned off.

Host port refers to the port used by Nemo Server. For TCP and UDP protocols, the default port is
5001.

Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection
attempt will fail.

Listen port refers to the port used by the client. For TCP and UDP protocols, the default port is
6015.

Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data, or both.

Transfer timeout determines the maximum waiting time after data connection. If the transfer
attempt timeout value is exceeded before data connection, the data connection attempt will be
stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of Transfer timeout values is from 0
to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds.

Page 115
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

TCP window size defines the size of the receive window during TCP/IP transmission. If it is too
small, it can decrease the maximum data throughput, and if it is too high it can increase the
retransmission round-trip time (RTT). To be able to avoid decrease of data throughput, the window
size should be at least the maximum throughput multiplied by RTT. For example, with HSDPA with
category 8 the maximum throughput is about 7.3 Mbit/s and RTT is about 100 ms. To avoid
reduction of the throughput the TCP window size should be set at least to 7.3 Mbit/s * 0.1 s = 730
kbit = 91.25 kB.

Downlink testing (these values are indicative only):

Max. throughput ~RTT (ms) TCP window size TCP window size (kB)
(kbit)

64 kbps (GPRS/ 600 38.4 4.8


EDGE)

128 kbps (GPRS/ 600 76.8 9.6


EDGE)

256 kbps (GPRS/ 600 153.6 19.2


EDGE)

384kbps (Rel. 99) 200 76.8 9.6

HSDPA 1.8Mbps 100 180 22.5


UE category 3 & 4

HSDPA 3.6Mbps 100 360 45


UE category 5 & 6

HSDPA 7.3Mbps 100 730 91.25


UE category 7 & 8

HSDPA 10.2Mbps 100 1020 127.5


UE category 9

HSDPA 14.4Mbps 100 1440 180


UE category 9

TCP buffer size is the amount of data that can be buffered during a connection without a
validation from the receiver. It can be between 1 and 8291 kbytes.

UDP buffer size is the amount of data that can be buffered during a connection without a
validation from the receiver. It can be between 1 and 8291 kbytes.

UDP bandwidth defines how much data is attempted to be transmitted. Since UDP does not
guarantee successful data transmission, it is not limited by maximum throughput of the lower
layers. If higher data transmission rate is used, the packet error rate (PER) increases. For example,
if lower layers are capable of transmitting 100kbit/s and UDP bandwidth is configured to 400kbit/s,
there should be a 75% packet error rate (only every fourth packet has been able to transmit
successfully). Naturally UDP bandwidth should not be configured too small since it limits the
maximum throughput that is not normally desired.

Page 116
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

UDP datagram size defines the size of the UDP packet in bytes. It should be smaller than the
maximum packet size of the lower layers to be able to avoid packet fragmentation in the lower
layers. Packet fragmentation has a huge negative impact to the achieved data throughput and it
should be avoided. On the other hand if too small UDP packet size is used the portion of the UDP
and IP header increases which decreases the amount of transmitted user data with the result of
smaller data throughput. Normally good maximum value for UDP datagram is a little bit less than
maximum Ethernet packet size which is 1,500 bytes. A good default value for the UDP datagram
size is 1,460 bytes.

Number of threads defines the number of parallel Iperf data transfers.

Transfer duration defines the length of the data transfer in seconds.

Transfer data size defines the length of the total data transfer in kilobytes; that is, the transfer
finishes when the defined amount of data has been transferred. The size of the individual data
packages is defined in the Packet Size field.

Note that if you have chosen Transfer data size from the Packet Transfer Properties
dialog, the Transfer duration option will be disabled. This is because when the Transfer
data size option is used, the transmission will end after a certain amount of data has
been transferred. It is not limited by time.

Next, click OK to return to the Measurement Properties dialog. Click the PDP Context Properties
button.

6.7.2 Configuring the FTP protocol


Nemo Outdoor has an integrated FTP client, which can be used to measure data transfer rates
between Nemo Outdoor and the FTP server. The server can be any standard FTP server. Current
data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. The FTP module supports
firewall-friendly passive mode transfers. Normally when a data transfer is initialized, the server
opens a new connection to the client and then data is transferred through this connection. Some
firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests, and in that case the data
transfer would fail. With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the
firewall does not block the connection.

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server
(number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer
where you are running Nemo Outdoor.

To set up data measurements using FTP:


1. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to configure the measurement
devices.

2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see


Measurement Properties Measurement)

3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet
session settings).

4. Define FTP transfer-related settings in the FTP Transfer Properties dialog.

5. Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).

Page 117
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making data
transfers).

6.7.2.1 FTP Transfer Properties dialog


Open the FTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the FTP item in the Devices view.

Host name is the IP address of the FTP server used. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling
over an IPv4 connection.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals
without NMR, each connection must have its own IP address.

Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the
same IP address can be used.

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer
on which you are running Nemo Outdoor.

Port refers to the port used by the FTP server.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the FTP server.

In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the FTP server.

Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests, and in that case the
data transfer would fail. With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the
firewall does not block the connection. Select the Passive mode option to activate passive mode.

Page 118
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection
attempt will fail.

Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are
Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.

Address refers to the address of the proxy.

Port refers to the port used by the proxy.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.

In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy.

Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data.

Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.

Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer
will fail.

Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during one
FTP session.

Number of threads defines in how many threads the test file is split during an FTP transfer. For
example, the size of the downloaded file is 10MB. The number of threads is set to five. Nemo
Outdoor splits the 10MB file into five fragments with the size of 2MB each. All five FTP transfer
sessions are started simultaneously. Each thread creates a new FTP session and transfers a
fragment of the file. Total application data throughput is recorded including all threads. Resume is
not supported with multi threaded FTP transfers. In case of a data drop, all threads will start from
the beginning.

Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the FTP server. If you are receiving
data, this is the source file. If you are sending data, this is the destination file.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to
send for all of them, you must define a different remote file for each connection.
Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.

Also note that if there are several testing units using the same FTP server, we
recommend that you use a unique file name extension (e.g., filename_tester1.txt,
filename_tester2.txt, etc.) for each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are
trying to write in the same file.

Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. If you are receiving data,
this is the output file. If you are sending data, this is the source file. The default location for these
files is defined in the User Interface Properties Paths dialog.

Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size. This
functionality is available with FTP upload testing. The file is named with following format
<IMEI>_<file size in kB>.bin.

Select the Write local file to disk option to save the downloaded file on disk.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to
receive for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection.
Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.

Page 119
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Occasionally FTP UL data throughput values can exceed the maximum value supported by
the network. This is seen at the beginning of data transfers. The root cause is that the
operating system can buffer the data.

6.7.3 Configuring the SFTP protocol


Nemo Outdoor has an integrated SFTP client, which can be used to measure data transfer rates
between Nemo Outdoor and the SFTP server. The server can be any standard SFTP server. Current
data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. The SFTP module supports
firewall-friendly passive mode transfers. Normally when a data transfer is initialized, the server
opens a new connection to the client and then data is transferred through this connection. Some
firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests, and in that case the data
transfer would fail. With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the
firewall does not block the connection.

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server
(number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer
where you are running Nemo Outdoor.

To set up data measurements using SFTP:


1. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the
measurement devices.

2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see


Measurement Properties Measurement)

3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet
session settings).

4. Define SFTP transfer-related settings in the SFTP Transfer Properties dialog.

5. Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).

6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making data
transfers).

Page 120
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.7.3.1 SFTP Transfer Properties dialog


Open the SFTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the SFTP item in the Devices view.

Host name is the IP address of the SFTP server used. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling
over an IPv4 connection.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals
without NMR, each connection must have its own IP address.

Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the
same IP address can be used.

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer
on which you are running Nemo Outdoor.

Port refers to the port used by the SFTP server.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the SFTP server.

In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the SFTP server.

Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection
attempt will fail.

Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are
Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.

Address refers to the address of the proxy.

Page 121
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Port refers to the port used by the proxy.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.

In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy.

Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data.

Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.

Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer
will fail.

Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during one
SFTP session.

Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the SFTP server. If you are
receiving data, this is the source file. If you are sending data, this is the destination file.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to
send for all of them, you must define a different remote file for each connection.
Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.

Also note that if there are several testing units using the same SFTP server, we
recommend that you use a unique file name extension (e.g., filename_tester1.txt,
filename_tester2.txt, etc.) for each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are
trying to write in the same file.

Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. If you are receiving data,
this is the output file. If you are sending data, this is the source file. The default location for these
files is defined in the User Interface Properties Paths dialog.

Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size. This
functionality is available with SFTP upload testing. The file is named with following format
<IMEI>_<file size in kB>.bin.

Select the Write local file to disk option to save the downloaded file on disk.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to
receive for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection.
Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.

6.7.4 Configuring the HTTP(S) protocol


The HTTP(S) testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the
HTTP(S) protocol. The HTTP(S) protocol is used in web browsing. In HTTP(S) testing, the user
selects one file that will be downloaded or uploaded through the HTTP(S) protocol and this data
transfer is measured.

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server
(number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

To set up data measurements using HTTP(S):


1. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the
measurement devices.

Page 122
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see


Measurement Properties Measurement)

3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet
session settings).

4. Define HTTP transfer-related settings in the HTTP(S) Transfer Properties dialog.

5. Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).

6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making data
transfers).

6.7.4.1 HTTP(S) Transfer Properties dialog


Open the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the HTTP item in the Devices view.
The same dialog is used for defining HTTPS transfer properties.

In the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog, you can define the required data transfer settings.

Proxy Type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements.

Address refers to the address of the proxy.

Port refers to the port used by the proxy.

Page 123
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection
attempt will fail.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.

In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy.

Select the appropriate Authentication Scheme and define the username and password for the
authentication.

Direction defines whether the HTTP file is sent or received. For sending, there are two options:
POST and PUT.

Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.

Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer
will fail.

Number of threads enables all the threads to be started simultaneously with the same time
stamp. The number of threads can be defined by the user. Each thread transfers the entire file.

URL defines the IP address of the test file that will be downloaded when data is received. For
example, http://www.yourcompany.com/testfile.htm. Only one file will be downloaded at a time. If
you are sending HTTP data, URL defines the destination. To define a port for the transfer, type the
port number after the URL, for example, http://www.yourcompany.com:85.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals
without NMR, you must define a different URL from different servers for each of them.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, you
can use the same URL for all of them.

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer
where you are running Nemo Outdoor.

To make consecutive transfers, create a script with several HTTP transfers. See chapter Making
script files for instructions on making scripts.

Local File defines the output file and location for HTTP testing. The default location for these files is
defined in the User Interface Properties Paths dialog.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to
receive for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection.
Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.

Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size. This
functionality is available with HTTP upload testing. The file is named with following format
<IMEI>_<file size in kB>.bin.

Select the Write local file to disk option to save the downloaded file on disk.

User agent allows you to define the user agent string used for the HTTP/HTTPS transfer. It is by
default Nemo Outdoor, but it is possible to define another user agent. Please see the http://user-
agents.my-addr.com/user_agent_request/user_agent_examples-and-user_agent_types.php for
further details about user agents.

Select the Use SSL encryption option to transfer the files over a HTTPS connection.

Page 124
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.7.5 Configuring the (HTTP) browsing protocol


The HTTP Browser testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through
the HTTP Browsing protocol. The HTTP protocol is used in web browsing. In HTTP testing, the user
selects one URL address that will be downloaded through the HTTP protocol and this data transfer is
measured.

If you are experiencing problems with HTTP browsing testing, such as, the page
downloading time is increased, disable the following LAN settings: Automatically detect
settings and Proxy server.

To set up data measurements using HTTP browsing protocol:


1. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the
measurement devices.

2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see


Measurement Properties Measurement).

3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet
session settings).

4. Define HTTP browsing-related settings in the Browser Transfer Properties dialog.

5. Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).

6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making data
transfers).

Page 125
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.7.5.1 Browser Transfer Properties dialog


Open the Browser Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the Browsing item in the
Devices view.

URL defines the IP address of the test page that will be downloaded. For example,
http://www.yourcompany.com/testbrowser.htm. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling over an
IPv4 connection.

Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the
transfer will fail.

Select or clear the Display browser window option to display/hide the browser window during the
data transfer.

If Decode content information is selected, information about the images, texts and links are
written to measurement file including the number of content elements and size information.

In the Additional headers field you can type a custom HTTP header, for example, for identifying
the user agent.

The downloaded page can be seen during the measurement and the total time to download the
whole page is written to the measurement file. The cache is disabled by default. PPP and RLC layer
data throughputs are logged during the browser testing. The average PPP and RLC data
throughputs are also available. Average results are calculated from the time PDP context was active
(PAC- PAD). The connection setup time and the download time can be seen in Nemo Outdoor or
calculated with Nemo Analyze

For multi browser testing with single computer it is recommended that Nemo Server be
used for multiple simultaneous data connections, e.g. for benchmarking purposes as each
connection must have its own IP address (does not apply when NMR is used).

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer
where you are running Nemo Outdoor.

Page 126
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.7.6 Configuring the POP3 protocol


POP3, SMTP, and IMAP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and to
monitor how the message is transferred. POP3 and IMAP protocols are used for receiving and SMTP
protocol for sending emails.

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server
(number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

To set up data measurements using POP3:


1. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the
measurement devices.

2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see


Measurement Properties Measurement)

3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet
session settings).

4. Define POP3 Server settings in the E-Mail Settings POP3 dialog. Also define the test e-
mails that are used in the measurement.

5. Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).

6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making data
transfers).

6.7.6.1 E-Mail Settings POP3 dialog


Open the E-Mail Settings (POP3) dialog by double-clicking the POP3 item in the Devices view.

POP3 Server Settings define settings for the POP3 server used in the measurements.

Page 127
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Server name defines a name or an IP address for the POP3 server. You can also choose to use
IPv6 tunneling over an IPv4 connection.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, each
connection must have its own IP address.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the
same IP address can be used.

Port refers to the port used by the POP3 server.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the POP3 server.

In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the POP3 server.

Select the Use SSL encryption option to apply SSL encryption to the test email.

Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection
attempt will fail.

Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements.

Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are
Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.

Address refers to the address of the proxy.

Port refers to the port used by the proxy.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.

In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy.

POP3 receiving options define how the test e-mails are received and handled by Nemo Outdoor.

Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer
will fail.

Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.

Maximum number of messages to receive defines the maximum number of messages received
from the e-mail server.

Select the Delete messages after receiving option to delete all received test e-mails. This will
save disk space.

The View button opens a received test message in the E-Mail Editor dialog.

6.7.7 Configuring the SMTP protocol


POP3, SMTP, and IMAP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and to
monitor how the message is transferred. POP3 and IMAP protocols are used for receiving and SMTP
protocol for sending emails.

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server
(number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

Page 128
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

To set up data measurements using SMTP:


1. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the
measurement devices.

2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see


Measurement Properties Measurement)

3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet
session settings).

4. Define SMTP Server settings in the E-Mail Settings SMTP dialog. Also define the test e-
mails that are used in the measurement.

5. Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).

6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making data
transfers).

6.7.7.1 E-Mail Settings SMTP dialog


Open the E-Mail Settings (SMTP) dialog by double-clicking the SMTP item in the Devices view.

SMTP Server Settings define settings for the SMTP server used in the measurements.

Server name defines a name or an IP address for the SMTP server. You can also choose to use
IPv6 tunneling over an IPv4 connection.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections, each connection must have
its own IP address.

Page 129
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the
same IP address can be used.

Note that some operators prevent accessing SMTP services other than their own.
Therefore, it is not possible to test SMTP against the Nemo server with those operators'
SIM cards.

Port refers to the port used by the SMTP server.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the SMTP server.

In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the SMTP server.

Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection
attempt will fail.

Select the Use SSL encryption option to apply SSL encryption to the test email.

Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements.

Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are
Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.

Address refers to the address of the proxy.

Port refers to the port used by the proxy.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.

In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy.

Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer
will fail.

Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.

Messages to be sent defines the test messages used in the SMTP test. Click the Edit button to
open the E-Mail Editor where you can type the test message and attach files to the message.

Page 130
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.7.7.2 E-Mail Editor dialog


Use the E-Mail Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. You can attach files to the test
messages and save messages for later use.

New E-Mail Message button saves the current changes and opens an empty E-Mail Editor.

Open E-Mail Message button opens an Open dialog where you can open premade e-mail
messages.

Save E-Mail Message button saves the current e-mail message for later use.

Save As button saves the current e-mail message with a different name for later use.

Save Attachments button saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location.

Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test e-mail.

Add button opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message.

Remove button removes the selected attachment from the test message.

6.7.8 Configuring the IMAP protocol


POP3, SMTP, and IMAP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and to
monitor how the message is transferred. POP3 and IMAP protocols are used for receiving and SMTP
protocol for sending emails.

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server
(number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

Page 131
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

To set up data measurements using IMAP:


1. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the
measurement devices.

2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see


Measurement Properties Measurement).

3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet
session settings).

4. Define IMAP Server settings in the E-Mail Settings IMAP dialog. Also define the test e-
mails that are used in the measurement.

5. Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).

6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making data
transfers).

6.7.8.1 E-Mail Settings IMAP dialog


Open the E-Mail Settings (IMAP) dialog by double-clicking the IMAP item in the Devices view.

IMAP server settings define settings for the IMAP server used in the measurements.

Server name defines a name or an IP address for the server. You can also choose to use IPv6
tunneling over an IPv4 connection.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections, each connection must have
its own IP address.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the
same IP address can be used.

Port refers to the port used by the server.

Page 132
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the server.

In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the server.

Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection
attempt will fail.

Select the Use SSL encryption option to apply SSL encryption to the test email.

Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements.

Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are
Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.

Address refers to the address of the proxy.

Port refers to the port used by the proxy.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.

In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy.

IMAP receiving options define how the test e-mails are received and handled by Nemo Outdoor.

Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer
will fail.

Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.

Maximum number of messages to receive defines the maximum number of messages received
from the e-mail server.

Select the Delete messages after receiving option to delete all received test e-mails. This will
save disk space.

The View button opens a received test message in the E-Mail Editor dialog.

6.7.9 Configuring the WAP protocol


The WAP testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the WAP
protocol. The WAP protocol is used, for example, in web browsing. In the WAP testing, the user
selects one file that will be downloaded through the WAP protocol and this data transfer is
measured.

The WAP protocol stack used in Nemo Outdoor supports the following contents:

Content type

WMLC, WML 1.1/1.2/1.2.1 text and binary, WMLScript 1.1/1.2/1.2.1 text and binary

Character sets, WML Char-sets, US ASCII, UTF-8, UCS-2

ISO8859-1 (Latin), ISO8859-2 to 10 (other European), ISO8859-13 to 15 (other European),


SHIFT JIS (Japanese), WSP 1.0 (5 July 2001), WTP 0.0 (10-Jul-2001), WTLS (06-April-2001)2,
WP-HTTS (29-Mar-2001), WAP 2.0 /MMS

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server
(number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

Page 133
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

To set up data measurements using WAP:


1. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the
measurement devices.

2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see


Measurement Properties Measurement)

3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet
session settings).

4. Define WAP Gateway settings in the WAP Transfer Properties dialog.

5. Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).

6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making data
transfers).

6.7.9.1 WAP Transfer Properties dialog


Open the WAP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the WAP item in the Devices view.

WAP transfer properties define settings for the WAP gateway used in the measurements.

WAP gateway host defines a name or an IP address for the WAP gateway. Note that if you have
multiple simultaneous data connections, each connection must have its own IP address.

WAP gateway port refers to the port used by the WAP gateway.

Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection
attempt will fail.

Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer
will fail.

URL defines the IP address of the test file that will be downloaded. For example,
http://www.yourcompany.com/testfile.htm. Only one file will be downloaded at a time.

Page 134
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, you
must define a different URL from different servers for each of them.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the
same URL can be used.

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer
where you are running Nemo Outdoor.

To make consecutive downloads, create a script with several WAP transfers. See chapter Making
script files for instructions on making scripts.

Local file defines the output file and location for WAP testing. The default location for these files is
defined in the User Interface Properties Paths dialog.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to
receive for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection.
Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.

6.7.10 Configuring the streaming protocol


Note that to make video streaming quality measurements, Microsoft Network Monitor
must be installed and IP packet capturing must be enabled. Refer to chapter IP packet
capturing for more information.

The Streaming testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the
streaming protocol. The streaming protocol is used, for example, in video streaming. In the
streaming testing, the user selects one file that will be downloaded through the streaming protocol
and this data transfer is measured.

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server
(number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

In order to make streaming measurements with Nemo Outdoor version 7.20 onwards, you need to
have VLC player v. 2.1.0 or newer installed. With Nemo Outdoor versions 6.40 - 7.10, you need to
have VLC player v. 2.0.6 or newer (32-bit) installed on the computer. You can download VLC from
Nemo User Club http://nemouserclub.anite.com (Nemo Outdoor - Drivers for Test Mobiles and
Other Devices) or from http://www.videolan.org/vlc.

With Nemo Outdoor 6.2 and older versions, you need to have RealPlayer version 11 installed on the
computer. You can download RealPlayer 11 from Nemo User Club http://nemouserclub.anite.com
(Nemo Outdoor - Drivers for Test Mobiles and Other Devices).

To set up data measurements using streaming:


1. Install VLC.

2. Install Microsoft Network Monitor.

3. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the
measurement mobile.

4. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties Measurement dialog.


Also define the test files that are used in the measurement.

5. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet
session settings).

Page 135
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6. Define Streaming properties (see Streaming Properties).

7. Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).

8. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making data
transfers).

6.7.10.1 Streaming Properties dialog


Open the Streaming Properties dialog by double-clicking the Streaming item in the Devices
view.

Note that if the Streaming item is not available in the Devices view, VLC is not installed
on the computer. You can download a free player from http://www.videolan.org/vlc.

URL defines the IP address (http or rtsp) of the video file that will be streamed. For example,
rtsp://yourcompany.com/testfile.rm or videos from YouTube (m.youtube.com/video). Only one file
will be downloaded at a time. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections, you
must define a different URL from different servers for each of them. To make consecutive
downloads, create a script with several streaming sessions. See chapter Making script files for
instructions on making scripts. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling over an IPv4 connection.

Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection
attempt will fail.

Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer
will fail.

Rebuffering timeout defines the maximum allowed buffering duration during video playback.

Select the Display video stream option if you would like to view the test clip during the
streaming.

Select the Streaming quality option to activate streaming video quality measurements with PVI.

6.7.11 Configuring the trace route protocol


By conducting trace route testing functionality, you can trace the servers pinged along the way to
the target server.

Page 136
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Ping trace route testing can be used to help troubleshooting network or Internet connections. The
ping utility tests responsiveness between two hosts, etc. With ping trace route testing it is also
possible to check responsiveness and trace the path of the packet from one host to another. In case
the network does not respond to ping or trace route requests with trace route testing, it is possible
to show the location right before the host that is not responding.

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server
(number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

To set up data measurements using the trace route protocol:


1. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the
measurement devices.

2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see


Measurement Properties Measurement)

3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet
session settings).

4. See below how to define Trace Route properties.

5. Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).

6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making data
transfers).

6.7.11.1 Trace Route Properties dialog


Open the Trace Route Properties dialog by double-clicking the Trace Route item in the Devices
view.

The Remote host field defines the IP address or URL of the target server of the trace route
measurement, for example, www.anite.com. You can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server. Just
make sure that the IP server used will respond to the ping. You can also choose to use IPv6
tunneling over an IPv4 connection.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections with different terminals,
each connection must be given its own, separate IP address!

Page 137
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the
same IP address can be used!

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer
on which you are running Nemo Outdoor.

Transfer timeout determines the maximum timeout seconds since the beginning of the operation.

HOP timeout defines the maximum amount of time to wait for an individual hop to complete.

HOP limit defines the maximum number of servers to be pinged along the way to the target
server.

By selecting the Resolve host names item, the names of the pinged servers will be reported by
Nemo Outdoor.

6.7.12 Making data transfers


After you have configured the data connection and selected and configured the data protocol, you
can start making the data transfers.

Note! Firewall must be deactivated when making data transfers.

To make data transfers:


1. Activate a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button.

Note that after you have activated the script, you cannot control the measurement
manually until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Stop Scripts
button.

2. To make manual CS data calls, click the Measurement control button in the Devices view
and select Start Data Call. Wait until the call is connected and connection established.

3. To make manual PS data calls, click the Measurement control button in the Devices view
and select Start Packet Session. Nemo Outdoor will automatically activate the PDP
context and make the GPRS attach.

4. To end the data transfer/data call, select Stop Packet Session/ Stop Data Call.

6.8 Streaming video quality testing


Streaming video quality testing allows you to monitor how streaming video is transferred in the
network. Data streaming can be made manually and with scripts. Nemo Outdoor supports PVI and
PEVQ-S streaming video quality testing. A video preview can be seen during the measurement in
Nemo Outdoor.

Only one active PEVQ-S connection is supported per PC. Only one active PS connection is
allowed while executing PEVQ streaming. When multiple test handsets are connected to
the same PC, a PS connection with only the test handset executing PEVQ-S testing is
allowed.

If a test handset has Nemo Media Router application installed, it prevents PEVQ-S testing
as NMR test handsets are always online. In such case, to run multiple PEVQ-S
connections simultaneously, a dedicated PC is required with only one NMR test handset
connected to the PC.

Page 138
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Before starting video streaming quality measurements, select the video quality algorithm used,
PEVQ-S or PVI, from the Device Configuration Voice/Video quality page.

In order to be able to make streaming video quality measurements using PEVQ-S, you will need to
install WinPCAP v. 4.1.3 and Flash Player on the computer and to define PEVQ-S settings in the
PEVQ-S dialog. WinPCAP and Flash Player are available in the Nemo product package and Nemo
User Club or you can download them from the product websites.

In order to be able to make streaming video quality measurements using PVI, you will need to
install VLC 2.0.6 or newer on the computer and to define streaming video settings in the Streaming
Properties dialog. VLC is available in the Nemo product package and Nemo User Club or you can
download it from the product website.

PVI video quality parameters are not available with 64-bit operating systems. PVI
streaming without video quality parameters is supported with both 32- and 64-bit
operating systems.

YouTube does not support the URL m.youtube.com and therefore PVI video quality
streaming testing cannot be done with the RTSP protocol.

Making streaming video quality measurements with PEVQ-S:


1. Check that WinPCAP v. 4.1.3 and Flash Player are installed on the computer.

Page 139
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

2. Select the PEVQ-S option from the Device Configuration Voice/video quality page.

3. Define the PEVQ-S settings in the PEVQ-S Properties dialog.

4. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button. From the Measurement control
menu in the Devices view, select Start New Data Transfer to start the data transfer with
the selected test devices.

5. From the Measurement control menu in the Devices view, select Stop Data Transfer to
end the data transfer or wait until the entire video clip has been streamed.

Only one active PEVQ-S connection is supported per PC and only one active PS connection
is allowed while executing PEVQ streaming. When multiple test handsets are connected
to the same PC, a PS connection with only the test handset executing PEVQ-S testing is
allowed.

If a test handset has Nemo Media Router application installed, it prevents PEVQ-S testing
as NMR test handsets are always online. In such case, to run multiple PEVQ-S
connections simultaneously, a dedicated PC is required with only one NMR test handset
connected to the PC.

Making streaming video quality measurements with PVI:


1. Check that VLC is installed on the computer.

2. Define the video streaming settings in the Streaming Properties dialog.

3. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button. From the Measurement control
menu in the Devices view, select Start New Data Transfer to start the data transfer with
the selected test devices.

4. From the Measurement control menu in the Devices view, select Stop Data Transfer to
end the data transfer or wait until the entire video clip has been streamed.

Page 140
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.8.1 PEVQ-S Properties dialog


When making video streaming quality measurements with the PEVQ-S algorithm, you need to
define some settings in the PEVQ-S Properties dialog.

Video offers a selection of preloaded videos that can be used in the testing. Only these preloaded
videos can be used for testing. The videos must be stored in folder Nemo Tools\Video Files. To
update the video files from the Opticom server, click the Update button.

Video quality defines the video resolution.

Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the
transfer will fail.

Select or clear the Display video stream option to display/hide the video stream window during
the data transfer.

The dialog also displays some information about the network adapters recognized by Nemo
Outdoor. If there are problems with PEVQ-S testing, check that your device appears on the list. If
not, restart the laptop and the adapter should appear on the list.

Page 141
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.9 VoIP calls


With the optional VoIP module combined to Nemo Outdoor, a user is able to perform IP telephony
measurements on the IP networks based on the established VoIP sessions.

Other PS data connections are not allowed at the same time with the same computer.

Only one VoIP connection per CPU can be done at the moment.

In order to be able to make VoIP call measurements, you will need to install a SIP server. Nemo
Outdoor VoIP system is compatible with Asterisk SIP Server. To find more information on installing
the Asterisk SIP server, login to http://www.asterisk.org/applications/pbx

Page 142
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

To start making VoIP call measurements, you will need to define some VoIP session settings in the
SIP Server Settings and VoIP Call Configuration dialogs. Open the SIP Server Settings dialog by
double-clicking the SIP Server item in the Devices view.

Domain defines the address of the SIP server, e.g. pbx.nemo.fi.

Port defines the SIP port. The default SIP port is 5060.

Username/Password defines the username that the user has registered to the server and the
corresponding password.

Connection timeout defines the timeout while trying to connect to the server.

Registration duration defines the duration for which the SIP registration is valid.

Automatic registration, when selected, automatically registers the user to the SIP server (as
soon as Packet Session has been created).

When selected, Use SIP proxy option enables the user to send outbound SIP messager via Proxy.

Proxy address/port defines the proxy, through which SIP messages are sent.

Page 143
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Open the VoIP Call Configuration dialog by double-clicking the VoIP Call item in the Devices
view.

SIP callee address defines the SIP address of the call receiver.

Audio codecs for the call can be selected from the list by selecting the box next to them. The
order of the codecs is significant since the first codec is offered as the primary codec when making
a call to a counterparty. For example, in the image above the primary codec offered for an outgoing
call is G729/8000. In addition, only selected codecs are used while negotiating the codec in the case
of an incoming call.

Select the Voice quality option to enable voice quality measurements for VoIP calls. Please note
that this option is available after you have selected the VoIP only option from the Device
configuration for mobiles and modems dialog.

Reference sample filename refers to the file used as the reference sample in the voice quality
measurements. Click the Browse button to select a file.

Select the Save sample files option to save the received sample files on the laptop.

With the Prefix for received sample files option you can define a prefex that will be added to the
filename of all received sample files.

Page 144
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

With the Save only samples below threshold option you choose to save only those samples that
are below a user-definable threshold (MOS score).

Script settings defines the duration of the call and the call attempt timeout in seconds.

Making VoIP measurements:


1. Define SIP Server Settings and VoIP Call Configurations.

2. To start packet session, click on the Measurement control button | Start Packet
Session.

3. To register SIP server, click on the Measurement control button | Register SIP Server.

4. To start VoIP measurement, click on the Measurement control button | Start VoIP Call.

5. To end VoIP measurement, click on the Measurement control button | Stop VoIP Call.

6. Finally, to unregister SIP server, click on the Measurement control button | Unregister SIP
Server (Note: This is not a mandatory step, a new call can be made without unregistering)

6.10 Application testing


Nemo Outdoor offers several application testing features.

6.10.1 Screencasting and touchscreen simulation


The screencasting and touchscreen simulation offer an automated way to test almost any
application running on the Android smartphone. With screencasting it is possible to test, for
example video calls, Netflix, Googleplay, WhatsApp messages, and voice calls.

The screen of the handset can be seen in Nemo Outdoor in real time. The user can send virtual
touch commands to the device based on user interaction with the screencasting view. These
sequences of touch commands and physical button commands are recorded to separate screencast
macro files that can be saved and reused.

The functionality works with handsets locally connected to the Nemo Outdoor PC, as well as with
handsets connected to Nemo Invex chassis, with and without handset isolation modules (HIM/
SHIM).

Recording a screencasting macro file is allowed for one device at a time.

In addition to touchscreen simulation, the new screencasting features can be used, for example, to
change the handset settings and to perform OTA updates.

Page 145
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

To open the screencasting view, click the Measurement settings button in the Devices view and
select Screencast.

The view on the left shows the device screen in real time. The buttons at the bottom of the view
simulate the devices Back, Home, and Power buttons.

Page 146
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

The Screencast macro view on the right is used to record touchscreen simulations. Click the Record
macro button to start recording.

Use your mouse to control the device screen. The selected commands appear on the list.

Stop the macro recording from the Stop macro button and save the macro. The macro file (.nscx)
will be saved in the Scripts folder.

Page 147
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

To load a macro file, click the Load macro button and select a file in the Screencast Macro File
Selection dialog. The same macro file can be used with several devices.

Macro files can be activated with script files using the Send Screencast Macro script command.

Page 148
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.10.2 Facebook testing


In order to be able to test the Facebook application, you will need to set up a Facebook account.

To start running Facebook tests, you will need to define some Facebook settings in the Facebook
Configuration dialog. Open the dialog by double-clicking the Facebook item in the Devices view.

Please note that if the Facebook item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo
Outdoor license does not support Facebook testing.

If you already have a Facebook account, type in the Username. The username can be found from
the General Account Settings in Facebook.

Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the
transfer will fail.

User access token is required for Facebook testing. Enter the username and click the Get Access
Token button. You will be redirected to the Facebook login page. Enter your account information
and select the Keep me logged in to option. Click Log In. You will return to Nemo Outdoor and
an access token will appear in the field.

Page 149
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Application ID and Application access token fields are required only if you have your own
application for accessing Facebook. Otherwise you can leave these fields empty and the Nemo Fabo
application will be used by default.

When performing Facebook testing with multiple devices, use the same Facebook account
on all of them. With Nemo Invex II, use different UICs for the data connections and then
you can use individual Facebook accounts for each of them.

You can define a Photo that will be uploaded on the wall of your Facebook profile.

Comment is text that will either be posted as a status update (without a photo) or as a caption for
a photo.

Limit for feed retrieval defines how many items or from how many days items will be retrieved
from the wall when the user executes the Get Wall Feed command.

After defining Facebook settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click the
Measurement control button and select one of the Facebook-related commands. The following
information is logged for each command: operation type, success/failure, time elapsed, and amount
of data received/sent.

Get friend list will download the friend list from you Facebook account.

Get wall feed will download the wall feed from you Facebook account. The amount of data
downloaded is defined by the Limit for feed retrieval setting in the Facebook Configuration dialog.

Post status update will upload the text typed in the Comment field and post it on the wall of your
Facebook profile.

Post photo will upload the photo selected in the Facebook Configuration dialog and the text typed
in the Comment field as caption on the wall of your Facebook profile.

Page 150
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Please note that Facebook has its own limits for the number of account actions per day.
Check the Facebook Help Center for current information about the limits. If you see an
error message, it means the Facebook limit has been reached. It is not a permanent
error, so the feed will continue to work, and once the limit is reset at the Facebook end
(daily), new posts will be posted again automatically.

Currently each app is given an allotment of 200 API calls per user in any given 60 minute
window. Please note that Facebook can change this limit. Please see more details from:
https://developers.facebook.com/docs/graph-api/advanced/rate-limiting

Custom Facebook test applications offer more flexibilities to test Facebook with drive test
tools as some of the limits seen with normal Facebook apps do not apply, such as number
of allowed postings per hour. Please see the following link for further information:
https://developers.facebook.com/docs/apps. To create your own Facebook test
application, please login to https://developers.facebook.com/docs/apps/register

If Facebook benchmarking is done using a commercial laptop, the same user account
settings must be used with all test devices.

6.10.3 Twitter testing


In order to be able to test the Twitter application, you will need to set up a Twitter account.

To start running Twitter tests, you will need to define some settings in the Twitter Configuration
dialog. Open the dialog by double-clicking the Twitter item in the Devices view.

Please note that if the Twitter item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo Outdoor
license does not support Twitter testing.

Page 151
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

If you want to follow the Twitter feed of a specific user or a hashtag, type in the username/hashtag
in the @User/#Feed field without the @ or # symbols.

Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the
transfer will fail.

User access token and User access token secret are required for Twitter testing. Click the Get
Access Token button. You will be redirected to the Twitter login page.

Enter your account information and select the Remember me option. Click Sign In. You will return
to Nemo Outdoor and the access token and access token secret will appear in the field.

Application access token and Application access token secret fields are required only if you
have your own application for accessing Twitter. Otherwise you can leave these fields empty.

You can define an Image that will be uploaded to your Twitter feed.

Comment is text that will be posted as a tweet.

Limit for feed retrieval defines how many items or from how many days items will be retrieved
from the feed when the user executes the Get Feed command.

Please note that Twitter has its own limits for the number of account actions per day.
Check the Twitter Help Center for current information about the limits.

Page 152
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

After defining Twitter settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click the
Measurement control button and select Start New Data Transfer | Twitter and then one of the
Twitter-related commands.

Get User Feed will download your own Twitter feed.

Load Profile will download the Twitter feed from the selected user (defined in the Twitter
Configuration dialog, @User / #Feed field).

Follow Feed will download the feed from the selected Twitter hashtag. The amount of data
downloaded is defined by the Limit for feed retrieval setting in the Twitter Configuration dialog.

Post Feed will upload the text typed in the Twitter Configuration dialog, Comment field and
post it on your Twitter feed.

Post Image will upload the image selected in the Twitter Configuration dialog on your Twitter
feed.

Page 153
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

You can follow Twitter-related statistics in a grid.

6.10.4 Instagram testing


In order to be able to test the Instagram application, you will need to set up an Instagram account.

To start running tests, you will need to define some settings in the Instagram Configuration
dialog. Open the dialog by double-clicking the Instagram item in the Devices view.

Please note that if the Instagram item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo
Outdoor license does not support Instagram testing.

If you already have an Instagram account, type in the Username.

Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the
transfer will fail.

Page 154
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

User access token is required for Instagram testing. Click the Get Access Token button. You will
be redirected to the Instagram login page. Enter your account information and click Log In. You
will return to Nemo Outdoor and an access token will appear in the field.

Application ID and Application secret fields are required only if you have your own application
for accessing Instagram. Otherwise you can leave these fields empty.

Searchable tag/username defines a tag or a username from which the feed will be downloaded.

Limit for feed retrieval defines how many items or from how many days items will be retrieved
from the feed when the user executes the Get Feed command.

After defining the settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click the
Measurement control button and select Start New Data Transfer | Instagram and then one of
the Instagram-related commands.

Get User Feed will download the Instagram feed of a selected user.

Page 155
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Get Self Feed will download your own Instagram feed.

Get Popular Feed will download the popular feed from Instagram.

Search Media with a Tag will download the feed from the selected hashtag (defined in the
Instagram Configuration dialog). The amount of data downloaded is defined by the Limit for feed
retrieval setting in the Instagram Configuration dialog.

You can follow Instagram-related statistics in a grid.

6.10.5 Dropbox testing


In order to be able to test the Dropbox application, you will need to set up a Dropbox account.

To start running tests, you will need to define some settings in the Dropbox Configuration dialog.
Open the dialog by double-clicking the Dropbox item in the Devices view.

Please note that if the Dropbox item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo
Outdoor license does not support Dropbox testing.

Page 156
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

User access token is required for Dropbox testing. Click the Get Access Token button. You will
be redirected to the Dropbox login page. Enter your account information and click Sign In. You will
return to Nemo Outdoor and an access token will appear in the field.

Application access token is required only if you have your own application for accessing Dropbox.
Otherwise you can leave this field empty.

Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data.

Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the
transfer will fail.

Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the Dropbox server. If you are
receiving data, this is the source file. If you are sending data, this is the destination file.

Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. If you are receiving data,
this is the output file. If you are sending data, this is the source file. The default location for these
files is defined in the User Interface Properties Paths dialog.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to
receive for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection.
Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.

Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.

Page 157
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

After defining the settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click the
Measurement control button and select Start New Data Transfer | Dropbox. Nemo Outdoor
will perform the Dropbox data transfer.

You can follow Dropbox-related statistics in a grid.

File size is not written to the DREQ event and because of that, the device status does not show a
progress bar for DL or UL transfers.

With uplink data transfers the UL data throughput goes up and down. This is normal behavior as the
uploaded files are split to 4MB fragments and uploaded to server with separate upload commands.

Page 158
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.11 SMS testing


SMS testing allows you to monitor how text messages are transferred in the network. Open the
SMS Testing dialog by double-clicking the Short Messaging Service item in the Devices view.

Note that the Qualcomm IMS IR.92 VoLTE option is required for SMS over LTE testing. In
addition, if you are using the Samsung IMS, you will need the Samsung IMS IR.92 VoLTE
option.

Phone Number defines the number of the mobile where you are sending the test messages. Enter
the number without spaces and with the international country code; for example, +3581234567.

Service Center Address defines the message center number of the mobile from where the
messages are sent. The number is found from the test mobile SMS settings.

Timeout defines the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is terminated.

When the End-to-end message option is selected, a unique ID consisting of 42 characters is


added to the beginning of the message text when the SMS is sent. When the measurement file is
added to the Nemo Analyze database, Nemo Analyze is able to recognize the SMS and the time it
took for it to reach its destination from the time of sending during post-processing.

All handlers support sending and receiving concatenated SMS messages.

Message refers to the user-defined test message that will be sent. The limit is set to 15000
characters.

With IMS SMS testing it is not recommended to use more than 160 characters.

Making SMS testing measurements:


Note that with CDMA terminals, before carrying out SMS testing in Nemo Outdoor, you
must send an SMS to the target phone number using the terminal's keypad. After that
Nemo Outdoor can be used to send the same message again.

Page 159
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

To be able to calculate end-to-end delivery time in CDMA networks, SMS testing must be
done using the same operator between two terminals. This is due to the fact that SMS
message ID changes from operator to operator.

1. Define the Phone Number (with the international country code and without spaces) where
you are sending the test SMS message.

2. Enter the Service Center Address of the test mobile from which you are sending the test
SMS. The number can be found from your mobile SMS Settings.

3. Define the Timeout, i.e., the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is
terminated.

4. Type in the test message and click OK.

5. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button in the ribbon, Home tab. From the
Devices view, select Measurement control | Send SMS Message to send an SMS with
the selected devices.

6. You can view, for example, from a grid window if the test message was delivered
successfully. Open an event grid (Data Windows | New Grid | Event Grid). Open the
Grid Properties dialog (right-click on the grid and select Properties from the popup menu).
Clear all selections and select the Short Message Service item and click OK. The grid will
now display only the selected SMS testing-related events.

6.12 MMS testing


MMS testing allows you to monitor how multimedia messages are transferred in the network. MMS
messages can be sent manually and with scripts. In addition to successfully sent/received MMS
messages, also sending/receiving attempts and sending/receiving failures are recorded enabling
statistical success rate calculations. Nemo Outdoor measures total MMS sending delay. Also
separate delays from Attach, PDP context activation, logging to MMSC, and message
sending/receiving are recorded.

In order to be able to make MMS measurements, you will need to define some MMS-related settings
in the Packet Session Settings dialog.

Note that you need to define the MMS settings also on the device receiving the MMS
messages.

Please note that if you create a script for making MMS measurements, the script must not
contain a PDP activation command.

6.12.1 Packet session settings for MMS


Open the Packet Session Settings - MMS dialog by double-clicking the Multimedia Messaging
Service item in the Devices view. The MMS tab is opened by default.

Packet Session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. All the
parameters in the Packet Session and the Basic QoS and Extended QoS tabs are operator-specific.
You must select the correct parameters to make the packet transfer function. Contact the operator
of the network that you are measuring.

Page 160
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.12.1.1 MMS
In the MMS tab, all the settings are required in order to make MMS measurements.

MMSC address defines the MMS Service Center address. This setting is operator-specific.

MMSC username defines the MMS Service Center username. This setting is operator-specific.

MMSC password defines the MMS Service Center password. This setting is operator-specific.

WAP gateway host refers to the WAP gateway host. This setting is operator-specific.

WAP gateway port refers to the port used by the WAP gateway. This setting is operator-specific.

Connection timeout defines the time in seconds after which the connection attempt is terminated.

Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds after which the MMS sending attempt is terminated.
In case of high MMS sending/receiving failures it is recommended to increase the default time out
time from 30 seconds to 60 seconds.

Message to be sent refers to the test MMS message used in the measurement.

Message Editor button opens the MMS Editor dialog for editing and creating MMS messages.

Page 161
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.12.2 MMS Editor dialog


Use the MMS Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. You can attach files to the test
messages and save messages for later use.

New MMS Message saves the current changes and opens and empty MMS Editor.

Open MMS Message opens a premade MMS messages.

Save MMS Message saves the current MMS message for later use.

Save As saves the current MMS message with a different name for later use.

Save Attachments saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location.

Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test message.

Add opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message.

Remove removes the selected attachment from the test message.

6.12.3 Making MMS measurements


Follow these step-by-step instructions for making MMS measurements.

You should have all the measurement devices connected and activated.

Note that you need to define the MMS settings also on the device receiving the MMS
messages.

Making MMS measurements:


1. Define the MMS-related Packet Session Settings (see Packet session settings for MMS).

2. Edit the test message and add the media attachments in the MMS Editor.

Page 162
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

3. If you want to make automated measurements, create a script for MMS measurements (see
Making script files).

4. If you are making manual measurements, that is, not using a script, select Send MMS
Message from the Measurement control menu or from the Measurement menu.
Nemo Outdoor will send the test MMS.

5. If you are using a script, activate the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. This
will start the measurement.

6. You can view, for example, from a grid window if the test message was delivered
successfully. Open an event grid (Data Windows | New Grid | Event Grid). Open the
Grid Properties dialog (right-click on the grid and select Properties from the popup menu).
Clear all selections and select the Multimedia Message Service item and click OK. The
grid will now display only the selected MMS testing-related events.

6.13 USSD testing


USSD testing is not supported with Huawei UEs.

USSD testing allows you to monitor how USSD messages are transferred in the network. Open the
USSD Message dialog by double-clicking the USSD Message item in the Devices view.

Timeout defines the time in seconds after which the USSD sending attempt is terminated.

Message refers to the user-defined test message that will be sent. The limit for USSD messages is
182 characters.

Sending USSD messages:


1. Define the Timeout, i.e., the time in seconds after which the message sending attempt is
terminated.

2. Type in the test message and click OK.

Page 163
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

3. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button . In the Devices view, click the
Measurement Control button and select Send USSD Message to send a USSD message
with just one device. Nemo Outdoor will send the message.

4. You can view, for example, from a grid window if the test message was delivered
successfully. Open an event grid (Data Windows | New Grid | Event Grid). Open the
Grid Properties dialog (right-click on the grid and select Properties from the popup menu).
Clear all selections and select the USSD item and click OK. The grid will now display only
the selected USSD message testing-related events.

6.14 Start external application


This feature allows users to launch external applications from Nemo Outdoor as a part of the
automatic measurement sequence. You can define the executable as well as the command-line
parameters. With Nemo Invex, you can run external applications also on the measurement servers
(UICs).

The external application can be used to launch any proprietary or third-party applications that are
not built into Nemo Outdoor. This enables, for example, the testing of data protocols that are not
currently supported by Nemo Outdoor. You can then monitor the data throughputs from the PPP
data throughput parameter.

The external application feature can also be used to test web browsing. An APP event is written to
the log file when a web browser is launched and closed. The user must set the cache size to
minimum from the browser settings.

The Start External Application dialog is accessed through the Script Editor. Select Start
External Application under General in the parameter tree on the right.

Page 164
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Application Name defines the application that you want to run from Nemo Outdoor while making
measurements. Define the path where the application .exe file is located on your computer. For
example, C:\Program Files\Mozilla Firefox\firefox.exe.

Please note that clicking the Browse button will only show the folders on the local
computer. If you want to run an external application on a measurement server (Nemo
Invex), check the path from that server, for example, with Remote Desktop and type in
the path manually.

If you select the Wait until completed option, the test script will be on hold until the external
application is closed.

Arguments defines what file or web page will be opened in the external application once it is
started. For example, if you start Internet Explorer, define here a URL
(http://www.anite.com/nemo). You can also leave the field empty. Note that there should be no
spaces between the characters in the pathname or target file specified in the Arguments field.

Working Folder refers to the folder that the application uses to open and save files. For example,
C:\Temp.

Page 165
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.15 ICMP Ping


The ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) Ping functionality allows you to perform ping
measurements simultaneously with data transfers.

Host name refers to the IP address or URL that is being pinged, for example, www.anite.com. You
can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server. Just make sure that the IP server used will respond to
the ping.

Packet size is the size of the ping packet that is used to measure ping time. The value determines
the size of the packet sent to the server. In addition, it determines the size of the reply packet that
the server uses to reply Nemo Outdoor.

Timeout determines the maximum time that Nemo Outdoor waits for a reply packet from the
server. If this time is exceeded, the ping measurement event will be created by using the timeout
parameter
(=-1).

Delay defines the delay duration in milliseconds. In addition to the duration, also define where the
delay will occur. The options are:

Delay between requests which means the protocol will always wait for a reply before
sending new request. If the delay is less than the ping delay, a new request is sent
immediately after the reply.

Delay from reply to request which means a new ping is sent after a reply is received.

Select the Repeat n times option if you would like to define the number of times the ping
measurement is repeated.

Select the Repeat until stopped option if you would like to continue the ping measurement until
you stop it manually.

Example 1. RTT time is 100ms and delay from reply to request is set to 1 s. New request is sent
every 1.1s (100ms + 1000ms). If delay between request is selected, a new request is sent every
1000ms.

Page 166
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Ping reply

Example 2. RTT time is 100ms and delay from reply to request is set to 50ms. New request is
sent every 150ms (100ms + 50ms). If delay between request is selected, a new request is sent
every 100ms because the protocol always waits for a reply before sending a new request.

Ping reply

To make ping measurements:


1. Open the Ping Settings dialog by double-clicking the ICMP Ping item in the Devices view.

2. Define the required ping parameters and click OK.

3. Click the Start Recording button.

4. In the Devices view, click on the Measurement control button and select Start Packet
Session. Wait until the status field in the Device Status window says PDP Context
Activated.

5. From the Measurement control menu, select Start ICMP Ping. If you selected the Ping
until stopped option in the Ping Settings dialog, select Stop ICMP Ping to stop the ping
measurement. Otherwise, the ping will be repeated the user-defined number of times.

6.16 Indoor mode


Nemo Outdoor indoor mode should be used when making measurements indoors. The mode is
activated by clicking the Go to Indoor mode button in the ribbon, Measurement tab.

When the indoor mode is activated the functionality of Nemo Outdoor changes:

To start measuring an Indoor window needs to be open and a floorplan loaded.

When the measurement is started, the user is prompted to select the starting position in
the Indoor window. The selected location is used to automatically create the first marker.

Measurement archive compression is enabled automatically, in other words, the files below
are compressed into a single measurement archive (ZIP file). After the files are
compressed, the original files are deleted.

o measurement files (.nmf)

o binary files (.nbl)

o packet capture files (.pcap)

Page 167
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

o marker files (.mrk)

o indoor map files (.tab and image)

The floorplan file or the current floor layer cannot be changed during measurements to
prevent mismatch during post-processing.

Information about the current mode (Indoor/Outdoor) is written to the measurement file
header.

6.16.1 Viewing indoor maps


Open an indoor map by selecting Data Windows | Indoor | New Indoor Window and select a
map file. The supported indoor map types are MapInfo, iBwave, and Google Earth maps (.kmz).
Please refer to Google Earth documentation on how to create KMZ files. KMZ and MapInfo maps
have the same functionalities. For more information on iBwave files, please see chapter iBwave
maps.

Page 168
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

It is possible to view selected parameters on an indoor map by drag and dropping them in it. Click
on a parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. Parameters can also be
opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press down the Ctrl button and
select the devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. After this, right-click on the parameter
you wish to view from the parameter tree and select Open in Indoor from the drop-down menu.

Page 169
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

To view a route on the floorplan you must have a marker file (.mrk) attached to the measurement
file (.nmf). To move the markers on the map, select a marker in the Markers | Index field, click
on Move and select a new destination for the marker.

On the map you can view, for example, a floorplan of the test site. While you are performing the
measurement and walking around in the building, use markers to draw the measurement route on
the floor plan. Markers are added by clicking the Add marker and Add marker on GPS position
buttons in the Indoor map toolbar.

Select the Add marker tool and click on the map. The marker will be placed in the selected
location. The Add marker on GPS position tool can be used only when measuring in Indoor mode
with a georeferenced floorplan and valid GPS coordinates. The marker will be placed in the current
location.

You can observe the values of certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map. You
can define which color refers to which parameter value. This way it is easy to spot the problem
areas on a map. Map layers can be saved to .gst file and also as a custom window.

Page 170
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.16.2 Floorplans and BTS files


You can also use BTS files on indoor maps. DAS and small cell BTS types are also supported.

Open a route on an indoor map. Click the Add BTS File button and browse for a BTS file.

Page 171
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

After the BTS file is loaded, select a device that will be connected with the BTS file. Click OK.

The BTS icons will appear on the map and when the measurement file is played back, a line is
drawn from the test device to the serving base station.

Page 172
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.16.3 Multiple routes and floorplans


You can also view more than one route on a floorplan. Click on Add Route in the Layers view in the
side panel to add a route, and go through the steps mentioned above.

The floorplan below has three routes, two with parameter-based coloring and one with a default
color. When more than one route with parameter-based coloring exists, you can switch between the
color legends in the Color legends side panel.

You can load multiple floorplans in the indoor map by clicking on the Add Floorplan button in the
Layers view. This makes it possible for you to have, for example, indoor maps of different floors on
the same building at once. You can switch between the different floorplans through the Go
Downstairs and Go Upstairs buttons.

Page 173
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.16.4 Indoor route planning


Prior to conducting indoor measurements, you can plan the route in the indoor map window. You
can create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint button in the map toolbar, and
clicking on the map. The Add button at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel is also
activated. A new route plan (.rpf) is viewed in the Layers view. You can save the route plan for later
use by clicking on the Save Route Plan icon in the map toolbar or by selecting it in the map
popup menu.

The route planning functionality with indoor measurements works in the same way as with outdoor
maps. See chapter Route plans for more information.

6.16.5 iBwave maps


iBwave indoor maps can be viewed in Nemo Outdoor. Please refer to iBwave documentation on how
to create iBwave maps that can be imported to Nemo Outdoor. iBwave files may contain UTM
coordinates in addition to WGS84 coordinates. Nemo Outdoor supports both coordinate formats
when loading transmitter files. Please note that both the tab file and the transmitter file must use
the same coordinate system.

To view measurement data on iBwave maps, select Data Windows | Indoor | New Indoor
Window. Select an iBwave map file and click Open.

If the map file contains several building, choose one of them and click OK.

Page 174
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

The map is opened. With the Go Downstairs and Go Upstairs buttons you can move the view
between floors. From the Layers list you can hide and displays the different floors and the BTS files
for each floor.

Nemo Outdoor will not automatically place the measurement route on the correct floor. Therefore,
when making measurements on several floors, it is advised to make a separate log file for each
floor and, for example, include the floor number in the measurement file name. Alternatively, you
can add a textual note in the log file identifying the floor number in question. This way you will be
able to place the measurement route on the correct floor when playing back the log file.

6.16.5.1 BTS files on iBwave maps


You can also view BTS sites on iBwave maps. An iBwave map file contains, by default, BTS sites but
you will also need a separate BTS file (.nbf or .csv) that has the same BTS sites with matching cell
IDs than the iBwave file. Without the .nbf/csv file, BTS cell information and antenna directions will
not be displayed.

Page 175
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

First open an iBwave map and click the Add BTS File button to open the BTS file.

Select the BTS file and then select the device connected with the map. Click OK.

Page 176
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

The BTS file appears in the Layers panel but to make it appear on the map, you will need to
associate it with the iBwave BTS file. To do this, right-click one of the iBwave BTS layers and select
Properties.

Scroll down to Linked BTS file setting and select the BTS file that you opened on the map and
click OK.

The BTS sites and cell information are now displayed on the map.

Page 177
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.16.6 DAS anomaly analysis


With DAS anomaly analysis, user can check and verify in-building small cells and DAS (Distributed
Antenna Systems) antennas giving simple pass, fail, or untested results for each cell.

Indoor small cell antennas and transmitters can be displayed on the indoor map with iBwave indoor
plans and Nemo BTS files (.nbf). DAS anomaly analysis is enabled from BTS Properties.

Please note that before you can activate DAS anomaly analysis, you will need to link a
BTS file to the map.

Enable DAS anomaly analysis by selecting a device in the field.

Cell test radius in meters defines how close the marker needs to be to the cell in order to perform
the DAS anomaly analysis.

Cell transparency defines how the circle is drawn. 0% is almost solid color and 100% is
transparent.

Signal level limits (dBm) defines the pass/fail limit for signal level for each system. If the signal
level is above the defined limit, the test result is passed and if the signal level is below the limit, the
test result is failed.

Cell search mode defines on which sites the test is performed.

Full: Requires that the BTS file contains the system, channel number, and scrambling code
information.

System and channel: Requires that the BTS file contains the system and channel number
information. Use this option with iBwave map files or if the BTS (.nbf) file does not include
the correct cell type information.

System: Requires that the BTS file contains the system information. Use this option with
iBwave map files or if the BTS (.nbf) file does not include the correct cell type information.

When the analysis is enabled, a circle is drawn around DAS and small cell cells. The color of the
circle depends on the cell test status:

Page 178
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Untested = gray

Failed = red

Passed = green

Whenever a marker is placed within the test radius of the serving cell location, the current signal
level of the serving cell is checked. If the signal level exceeds the defined limit (signal level limit
defined in the BTS Properties dialog), the cell is considered as passed (green) and if the signal level
is below the configured limit, the cell is considered as failed (red).

The same analysis is also performed during playback mode if the DAS anomaly analysis is enabled.
In addition to the map view, a DAS anomaly analysis results table displays the results for each cell.
The results view can be displayed/hidden from the indoor map popup menu.

6.16.7 RF ingress analysis


RF ingress analysis calculates distributions related to indoor (small cell and DAS) vs outdoor
(macro) cell coverage and gives real-time information of detected RF ingress. The analysis is based
on the cell type information read from the BTS file (.nbf). A cell is considered to be indoor or small
cell if the cell type in the BTS file is SMALL_CELL or DAS, otherwise the cell type is macro cell.

Please note that a BTS file must be set for all devices before RF ingress measurement is
started. If a BTS file has not been selected, all cells will be considered as macro cells and
the statistics calculated will be incorrect.

The signal strength comparison is done for each system and the comparison is performed for
serving, neighbor, detected, listed and monitored cells in each system.

LTE: RSRP

UMTS: RSCP

Page 179
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

GSM: RXL Sub/RXL full (neighbor set)

CDMA: RSCP

You can also plot RF ingress on a map using the colorset Cell type (RF Ingress).

Page 180
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.16.8 Indoor map popup menu


Right-click on the floorplan to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of
the map.

Page 181
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.16.8.1 Custom Window Properties dialog

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select
groups for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are
available for each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be
available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE
measurement.

6.16.8.2 Custom window - Save changes


Use the Save Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.

6.16.8.3 Custom window - Save as new custom window


Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu.
The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a name for the custom
window and define the custom window groups.

6.16.8.4 Save as - CSV file


Use the Save as CSV File command to export the active view into CSV format.

6.16.8.5 Save as - Image


Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a .jpg image.

6.16.8.6 Save as - MapInfo Tab-file


Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-File command to export the active view into MapInfo format.

6.16.8.7 Move view to


With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. See
chapter The ribbon contains all Nemo Outdoor commands. The commands are arranged in tabs.

Page 182
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Under the Nemo Outdoor button, you will find more commands.

View groups for more information on view groups.

6.16.8.8 Open map


By selecting the Open Map item, you can open existing map files (.tab).

6.16.8.9 Save map


By selecting the Save Map item, you can open the Save As dialog that you can use for saving the
map with another name.

Page 183
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.16.8.10 Import map


You can import your own bitmap files to Nemo Outdoor and use them as indoor maps. Click the
Import Map button in the map toolbar. Select an image file and click Open. The Map Import
Parameters dialog is opened.

In order for the map and route drawing to function correctly, you need to georegister the image file
or enter the exact dimensions of the map area.

To use georegistration, select Georegister and click OK. The image file will appear on the
Georegister Image map as a transparent box.

Adjust the location, width, height, and rotation of the image so that the image overlaps the right
spot on the map. Move the mouse cursor on top of the image so that the cursor changes into an
arrow/hand symbol and left-click with your mouse. Now you can move the image on the map. To
move the map beneath the image, move mouse cursor on the map so that the cursor changes into
an arrow/hand symbol and left-click with your mouse. Finally click OK to save the coordinates.

Page 184
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.16.8.11 Route plan - Create


The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in an indoor map
window, after which you can save the route plan.

6.16.8.12 Route plan - Open


Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on an indoor map.

6.16.8.13 Route plan - Save


The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf) for later use.

6.16.8.14 Save as MapInfo Tab-file


Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-File command to export the active view into MapInfo format.

6.16.8.15 Add waypoints


Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually.

6.16.8.16 Tool

The Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup. With the
Add Marker command you can add markers in the measurement file. The Arrow selection changes
the cursor back to an arrow. The Pan selection changes the cursor into a hand that can scroll the
map. The Center selection allows the map to be centered according to the cursor point. The Zoom
In and Zoom Out selections change the cursor into a magnifying glass. You can also zoom in and
out using the mouse wheel. The Clear Route command removes the measurement route from the
map. Note that this command is activated only during measurements. It cannot be used during
playback.

6.16.8.17 Center on new marker


The Center on New Marker option defines whether the indoor view is centered on a marker when
it is inserted.

Page 185
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.16.8.18 Auto center


The Auto Center tool for MapInfo pans the map so that the current location will stay on the
visible area of the map. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto Center
command is selected.

6.16.8.19 View entire map


The View Entire Map command displays the whole map.

6.16.8.20 View entire route


The View Entire Route command displays the whole route.

6.16.8.21 Textual comments


With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map. Select Add Textual
Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map. The box can be
repositioned by dragging it on the map. To remove or edit individual comments, right-click on the
text box and select Remove or Edit. To remove all comments, right-click on the map and select
Textual Comments | Remove All Textual Comments.

6.16.8.22 Add site


With the Add Site tool you can edit and add new BTS sites on the map. Please see chapter Editing
BTS files in Nemo Outdoor for more information.

6.16.8.23 Color legends


Color Legend displays the name of the selected Color Set on the map window.

6.16.8.24 DAS anomaly analysis results


When perfoming DAS anomaly analysis, the DAS anomaly analysis results table displays the results
for each cell. This command hides/displays the results view.

6.16.8.25 Show layers


Selecting the Show Layers item in the popup menu will display the Layers view in the side panel.

6.16.8.26 Show marker info


Show marker info hides or displays markers inserted into the measurement file.

6.16.8.27 Show markers


Show Markers hides or displays markers on a map.

6.16.8.28 Show minimap


With the Show Minimap command you can view and hide the Minimap in the Indoor window.
Minimap displays a miniature version of the map and the current location is highlighted with a red
square.

6.16.8.29 Show waypoints


The waypoints item will activate the free route planning functionality on the map. You can create
and save a route plan for later use. See chapter Creating and modifying route plans with waypoints
for more information.

Page 186
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.16.8.30 Show zones


You can view zones on iBwave maps. Zones in iBwave files are defined as MapInfo mif/mid files.
Right-click on the map and select Show Zones to display/hide the zones on the floorplan. Click on
a zone with the arrow tool to select the zone (the map is zoomed to the zone and the zone is drawn
less transparent).

6.16.8.31 Full screen


Full Screen switches the Indoor map view to full screen. Close the full screen view by clicking on
Close Full Screen in the popup window that appears.

6.16.8.32 Layer Properties Indoor map


In the Route Properties dialog, you can define map-related settings.

6.16.8.33 Indoor Properties dialog

Offset between routes defines the offset (in pixels) between routes on an indoor map. This value
is used with multi measurements where you have multiple routes which, without offset, would
overlap each other. You can also disable the default offset completely. To define offset values for
individual routes, go to the Route Properties dialog and define the X and Y offset values.

Page 187
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

With the Save markers in lat/lon format when the floorplan uses UTM coordinates option
you can select to save markers in GPS (lat/lon) WGS84 format when the iBwave map file has UTM
coordinates. The coordinate system used is saved to the marker file. In playback mode, the
coordinate system is detected when loading marker files so that both WGS84 and UTM format
marker files are displayed correctly.

6.16.8.34 MapX Properties dialog


Click the MapX Properties button to define some MapX specific properties. Note that these
settings differ according to the map provider. These settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file
by clicking the Save Map button in the Map window. To later open the .gst file, click the Open Map
button, select MapInfo Geoset file in the Files of Type listbox, and select a file from the list.

If you are using MapInfo maps, you can define the appearance of the map even further by
clicking the MapX Properties button in the Route Properties dialog. In the Layers tab the table
shows a list of the current layers. The order on the list defines the order in which the layers are
displayed on a map; for example, in this case the Route layer is on the top, Current Position layer is
under that, and World map is at the bottom. This utility is useful if you want to have a bigger map
on the bottom (e.g., a map of Europe) and a more detailed map of a smaller area (e.g., of Helsinki)
on top of that. To add layers on the map click Add. An Open dialog is opened where you can choose
the map you want to add as a layer. The map is added on the list and with the Up and Down you
can change the maps position on the list. By selecting and clearing the Visible option you can
decide whether or not to display the layer on the map. To remove layers from the map, select the
layer from the list and click the Remove button.

6.17 Measurement profiles


To make the measurement configuration for different devices more convenient, you can create
measurement profiles. A measurement profile contains all the necessary settings for making data
transfers, voice/video calls, sending messages, etc. The measurement profiles can also be exported
to another Nemo Outdoor system. See chapter Export/import settings for more information on
exporting settings.

To select a measurement profile for a device, go to the Devices view and click the arrow button
next to a service (e.g. voice call or Facebook) and select a profile from the list. Select None if you
wish to remove a profile from a device.

Page 188
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

To create a new measurement profile, go to the Devices view and click the arrow button next to a
service (e.g. voice call or Facebook) and select Edit Measurement Profiles.

In the Measurement Profiles dialog, click the Add button to create a new measurement profile
for the selected service or select one of the existing profiles. Type a name for the new
measurement profile and click OK.

A configuration dialog for the selected service is opened, for example, Voice Call Configuration
dialog for a voice call profile. Enter the required information and click OK. The measurement profile
is added to the Measurement Profiles dialog. In the future you can just select the measurement
profile from the list and start measuring.

6.18 IP packet capturing


With IP packet capturing, network packets sent between IP addresses are stored in log files and can
be post-processed with a third party application such as Ethereal. A separate log file is generated
for each test terminal making data transfers.

In order to use IP packet capturing in Nemo Outdoor:

1. First, install Microsoft Network Monitor. Go to Microsoft website to download the free
Network Monitor installation package. Select the NM34_x86.exe (for 32-bit Windows) or
NM34_x64.exe (for 64-bit Windows) installation file and click on Download.

Page 189
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

2. Once the installation file is downloaded, double-click on it. The Microsoft Network Monitor
3.4 dialog appears. Click Yes to continue installation and follow the steps in the installation
wizard to finish the installation.

3. Next, install Nemo Outdoor.

4. For 64-bit Windows you need to install an additional setup of Nemo Packet Monitor x64
7.x.x.exe (Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Packet Monitor must be of the same version) found in
the Nemo Outdoor product package. Double-click the file and follow the steps in the
installation wizard to finish the installation.

5. Start Nemo Outdoor, add a device, and go to the Measurement Properties,


Measurement page. Select the Enable IP Capture option.

Note that if the Enable IP Capture item is not on the list, the Network Monitor driver is
not installed.

IP packet capture measurement option has several states:

Disabled: IP packet monitoring is not performed at all

Enabled: a separate .pcap file is not written but, for example, KPI, IP service access time is
recorded

Partial logging: only message headers are recorded

Full logging: all messages are recorded

The IP packet data is stored in a separate file (.pcap) for each measurement terminal for which IP
capturing is enabled.

To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet decoding
function prior to performing data measurements. Select Full logging in the Enable IP Capture
field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. This file needs to accompany the
measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in
Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.

Page 190
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.19 Making script files


Note that it is not possible to use scripts with scanners.

The script file is an ASCII file containing the list of numbers that are to be called. The extension for
script files is .nsfx or .nsf (old script format). You can edit the Script file configuration in the Script
Editor dialog. When editing scripts, it is possible to have several Script Editor dialogs open and to
copy and paste commands from one script to another.

You can access this dialog by selecting Measurement | Script Editor (Ctrl+E).

The table in the middle shows a list of all functions and parameters in the current script.

Drag and drop commands to the Script view from the menu on the right. Selecting an item may
open a dialog where you need to define some parameters and settings. See earlier chapters for
more detailed information on the dialogs. You can rearrange the script items by drag and drop.

Insert Script can be used to insert the contents of another script file into the current script.

Repeat Script value defines how many times the script will be repeated during the measurements.
The range of repeat script values is from 1 to 10,000.

When the Use device settings for script commands option is selected, the settings that have
been configured in the Measurement Properties dialog are used for the script settings. For example,
if you have defined a Voice number in the Measurement Properties Configuration dialog, that
number is used when you add a voice call in the script and the Voice Call Properties dialog does not
appear.

New clears the entry fields for inserting new script values.

Open opens a dialog for selecting an existing script file to be modified or reviewed.

Save saves the file with the existing name or if the script is a new one, opens a dialog for inserting
the file name.

Close exits the dialog.

Page 191
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Notes about script functions:


Scrambling code or removed scrambling code can be selected for conditional testing using the IF
loop.

Examples of conditions:

Is different: If UMTS carrier RSSI is different than -70dBm

Whenever the value is other than -70dBm, IF condition is triggered

Is changed: If UMTS carrier RSSI is changed

Whenever the UMTS carrier RSSI value changes, the IF condition is triggered. The
reference value is unknown, which means that when starting the measurement and
when the first UMTS carrier RSSI value is received, the IF condition is triggered. The
next trigger occurs when the carrier RSSI value is different from the previous value.
For example,

Carrier RSSI value in the log file: -70dBm triggers the IF string

Carrier RSSI value -70dBm nothing happens

Carrier RSSI value -68dBm Triggers the IF string

6.19.1 Script transfer stop commands


With the forced stop command it is possible to abort a current script command. You can change the
status (normal or forced) of a script command, such as voice call or data transfer, by double-
clicking the end command.

For example, a data transfer can be canceled if the serving system changes, instead of waiting for
its completion. It is also possible to set a time duration for data transfers. If a data transfer is not
completed during a user-defined time, the Nemo Outdoor application will abort the data transfer
automatically. Please note that in this case the data disconnection status is written as Normal data
disconnect.

The forced stop command, e.g., with voice calls, can be used in conjunction with conditional or wait
commands as well. For example, if a call should be stopped when the system changes from GSM to
UMTS, the forced stop command can be used to end the call immediately after the system changes.
In the example below, the voice call is started only when the serving system is GSM. Call duration
is set to 120 seconds. It should be noted that the actual call duration is set with line three, Wait
until system is UMTS but at most 120s. After the call is connected, the script starts waiting for
the system to be changed to UMTS, or at most 120 seconds. The call is ended with End a voice
call (forced) with line 4 after 120 seconds, or when system changes to UMTS; whichever comes
first.

Page 192
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

GSM voice call example. Voice call is started only in GSM and aborted when system
changes to UMTS.

The forced stop command can be used also to stop active data transfers. In the example below the
script waits until the system changes to UMTS. Once the system is in UMTS, the script waits 5
seconds before making a voice call followed by PDP context activation and FTP data transfer. The
script stops, waiting until the system changes to GSM, but at most for 60 seconds. If the system
changes to GSM before 60 seconds, the voice call is continued normally until a 60-second call
duration is reached. FTP data transfer is aborted immediately when the system changes to GSM, or
after 60 seconds, whichever comes first. If line eight were End a voice call (forced), the voice call
would be stopped immediately after inter-RAT handover occurred.

Page 193
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.19.1.1 Receive call


In the Incoming Call Configuration dialog you can define settings for incoming calls.

Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. The duration timer is started from
the channel assignment. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds. Note that
the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay
Between Call Attempts parameter.

Call reception timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call reception attempt. If
the value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel, the call reception
attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the Call Reception
Timeout value is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds.

Select the Enable Nemo Server connection option to enable incoming calls from Nemo Server.
Nemo Server Settings button opens the HTTPS Options dialog where you can define connection
settings.

Own number defines the devices phone number.

Server line defines the Nemo Server phone number.

Select the Enable Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the voice
quality settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements.

Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is
compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the samples are of 8KHz
sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than six seconds in length. With the
Terratec sound card, sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample length
a maximum of 30 seconds. For ECHO measurements, use one of the following samples: 10s.wav,
4s_m.wav, 8s.wav, ru_6s.wav, and ru_6s_wb.wav.

Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files.

Page 194
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received
audio sample files. If you leave this field empty, the received audio files are not stored. When a
prefix is defined, Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time.wav where prefix
is the user-defined prefix, mos the voice quality score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision
but without decimal point, date in DDMMYYYY format, and time in HHMMSS format. For example:
terminal1_34_15112004_143045.wav.

Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved.
The threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. The default threshold
value is 5, which means that all samples are saved.

Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through the
Script Editor.

Note that with voice quality measurements when calling the Nemo audio server, the
delay time between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least
10 seconds.

6.19.1.2 Wait settings


To add pauses in the script, select Wait. In the Wait Settings dialog you can define different
conditions for the wait. You can also define custom conditions.

With the Wait until the time is option you can define a point in time after which the script
continues.

With the Wait for all scripts to be synchronized option you can place multiple synchronization
points inside the script file. Nemo Outdoors script group functionality enables you to synchronize
the script files and/or certain lines in the script file for certain devices. Both synchronization
methods can be used together or separately depending on needs of the user.

Page 195
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

In the example below both devices are doing PS data transfers. The idea is to start FTP download
simultaneously. Script files for both devices are identical except that IP address is different. Wait
for script synchronization command has been selected for both devices in the Wait settings
dialog. The Wait for script synchronization is seen on line two for both devices.

Both devices have been assigned for the same script group called PS data.

Script groups are useful especially if certain devices and when script files are needed to be
synchronized. In this example, it is not necessary to use the script group. As many synchronization
points as needed can be added to the script files. It should be noted that the number of
synchronization points between script files used in the same script group should be equal.

With the Wait Fixed and Random options you can define a fixed wait time (in ms) or a random
time (define the minimum and maximum values in ms) and then select one of the following:

Current time: wait (fixed or random) is added between items in the script.

Last notification: wait (fixed or random) is added after the selected notification. Select the
notification from the drop-down menu. For example, you can make the script pause for 60
seconds after a call attempt event. This will prevent the script from continuing before the
call attempt has completed. Note that also custom-made notifications can be selected here.

Page 196
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

With the Custom condition option you can make the script wait for a custom condition.
Click the Edit Rules button to access the Wait Custom Condition dialog where you can
define a wait condition. For example, you can define a specific parameter value.

Next notification: script waits for the selected event notification to appear. Select the
notification from the drop-down menu. For example, you can make the script wait until the
system changes from GSM to UMTS.

Current system is: script file continues only when the system selected from the drop-
down menu is in use.

But at most value is the maximum wait time in ms if the defined notification does not
appear.

Adding a pause in the script file:


1. First define the wait time in ms.

2. Then define from which point onwards the wait time is calculated: from the current time or
after a certain event notification, such as, call attempt.

3. If you selected the Last notification or Next notification option, define also the maximum
wait time in ms after which the script will continue.

Page 197
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.19.1.3 Advanced script settings

6.19.1.3.1 Conditional blocks


By selecting Advanced | If/End If, you will enter the If Condition Settings dialog. Here you can
define criteria which have to be met until a set of commands between the If - End If block in the
script takes place. If the criteria set in this dialog are met, Outdoor will perform the set of
commands within the If - End If block, and if the criteria are not met, this set of commands will be
skipped altogether and the script resumes from the first item after the End If command.

Page 198
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Next, add commands to the script and drag and drop them to their appropriate places. In the
following example script, Serving sys.=5 on the fourth row in the Parameters field indicates the
criteria that were set earlier. If the criteria are met, the commands between the If Condition and
End If commands will be performed.

6.19.1.3.2 Loops
You can add loops in the script files. Select Advanced | Loop/End Loop to enter the Loop
Settings dialog.

You can select from the following loop options:

Repeat the loop x times

Repeat the loop for x minutes

Repeat the loop until the time is x

Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met

Page 199
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

With the Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met option you can set
conditions for the loop to take place. Click the + button to define the parameteroperator and value
for the loop. Finally click OK to add the loop in the script. You can drag and drop the commands to
their appropriate places.

In the example below the voice call within the loop will be repeated twice before continuing with the
script.

In the example below the script is set to start and continue making calls only when and as long as
the call is connected to UMTS. As soon as there is a handover from UMTS to GSM, the call stops.

Page 200
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.19.1.3.3 Counters and timers


Counters and timers can be used with If and Loop commands as conditions. With a counter you can
define a number of instances and with a timer you can define a certain time in seconds.

In the Script Editor, select Advanced | Counter or Advanced | Start Timer. Define a name for
the counter/timer and click OK. The counter/timer can now be selected as a condition in the If and
Loop Condition Settings dialogs.

Below is an example of a script with both a timer and a counter. On row three there is a loop
command with a counter condition called GSM calls and a timer condition called Duration. The loop
is configured to repeat a voice call until one of the following conditions is met: number of calls in a
GSM system is five or the loop has been running for 600 seconds.

Page 201
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.19.2 Running scripts


After you have created a script, it will be saved and you can load it for measurements later on.

To run the script file:


1. In the Measurement Properties, Scripts dialog, select the script in the Script File field.
Note that you need to define the script for each device individually. The script can be
different for each device.

2. Click the Start Script button. Nemo Outdoor will start running the measurement according
to the script file. Note that if you have selected the Start Scripts Automatically option in
the User Interface Properties General dialog, Nemo Outdoor will start running the script
when you click the Start Recording button.

3. The program will now conduct the measurement as defined in the script file.

4. During measurements, you can stop and start the script for each measurement device
individually while the other devices will continue running their scripts. Select a device and
click the Start/stop script state for selected devices button in the Devices view. You
can then control the device manually.

5. You can monitor the script status in the Device Status view.

6. After the script is finished, you can stop the recording by clicking the Stop button in the
Home tab.

Page 202
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.20 Measurement lists


Measurement lists enable you to run automated measurements with several devices combining
multiple scripts. You can use measurement lists with just one device to run several scripts one after
another. Each measurement is recorded in a separate file. You can also use measurement lists in
idle mode.

In Online mode, select Measurement | Measurement List to open the Measurement List dialog.

Scheduled measurements displays a list of measurements that will be run when the
measurement list is started. Each measurement will be recorded in its own file. Click Add New to
add new measurements and Remove to delete selected measurements from the list.

Filename defines the filename format. The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-month-
day hours-minutes-seconds, e.g., 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination of the items
below. For example, "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows: 06May31_1. The last
number (%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded that day.

%a Abbreviated weekday name

%A Full weekday name

%b Abbreviated month name

Page 203
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

%B Full month name

%d Day of month as decimal number (01 31)

%H Hour in 24-hour format (00 23)

%I Hour in 12-hour format (01 12)

%j Day of year as decimal number (001 366)

%m Month as decimal number (01 12)

%M Minute as decimal number (00 59)

%n Sequence number (1 )

%N Sequence number (1 )

%p Current locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock

%S Second as decimal number (00 59)

%U Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day of


week (00 53)

%w Weekday as decimal number (0 6; Sunday is 0)

%W Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day of


week (00 53)

%y Year without century, as decimal number (00 99)

%Y Year with century, as decimal number

%z Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending


on registry settings; no characters if time zone is unknown

%Z Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending


on registry settings; no characters if time zone is unknown

Measurement areas are used to define geographical areas where measurement lists are paused
or allowed to run. See chapter Measurement areas for more detailed information on creating
measurement areas.

Measurement completion defines when the measurement list is finished.

Select the When all scripts are completed option to finish once all scripts have finished running.

Select the After recording duration option to finish after recording has been going on for a
certain period of time. Define the time in hours and minutes (hh:mm).

Select the At measurement size option to finish when the total size of the measurement files
reaches a certain limit. Define the size in kilobits (KB).

Select the Save statistics to file option to enable the CSV file writing.

Select the Send measurement results to server option to automatically upload the log files to a
server after running the measurement list.

Devices table displays a list of devices connected to Nemo Outdoor.

Script file defines the script file used in the measurement. Click the Script Editor button to edit
the selected script.

Page 204
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Properties opens the Measurement Properties - Script dialog.

Start runs the measurement list.

Click Load to load measurement lists and Save to save measurement lists. By default,
measurement list files (*.nmlx) are saved to the Configuration files folder. You can save and load
measurement lists to/from a file or to/from an FTP server.

To save a measurement list on an FTP server, select Save | Save To FTP Server. Click the FTP
Options button to define settings for the FTP server. See page 317 for more information on the
settings.

Define a name for the .aex file on your PC. The measurement list will be saved in this file.

To load a measurement list from an FTP server, select Load | From FTP Server. If you have not
defined any FTP server settings, the list will be empty. When FTP server settings are defined, a list
of exported measurement list files will appear. Select a file and click Open.

Creating a measurement list:


1. Click the Add New button to add a new measurement.

2. Select a device from the Devices list.

3. Select a script from the Script File field. You can edit the selected script by clicking the
Script Editor button.

4. Repeat the previous steps until you have a complete measurement list.

5. Select the When all scripts are completed option. Finally, click Start.

6. The measurement list is finished after all scripts have been completed.

7. To save the measurement list, click Save.

Page 205
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.20.1 Measurement areas


Please note that this feature works only with OpenStreetMap data.

Measurement areas are used to define geographical areas where measurements are paused
(blocked areas) or allowed to run (trigger areas). Blocked areas are represented as red rectangles
or polygons and trigger areas are green rectangles or polygons.

To draw and area on the map, select the correct tool for a trigger area or a blocked area and draw
the points on the map. To finish drawing, double-click the last point. The areas can be modified with
the arrow tool by selecting a point along the edge of the area and clicking on the new location.

A list of all defined trigger and blocked areas is displayed on the right-hand side of the dialog. You
can remove areas by clicking the X next to the area name.

The pause logic and areas work as follows:

If only trigger areas are defined, measurement is allowed in the trigger areas and other
areas are considered to be blocked, i.e. measurement is not allowed. In the example below,
measurements will be run when the test vehicle is in the green areas. Otherwise
measurements will be paused.

If only blocked areas are defined, measurement is not allowed in the blocked areas and
other areas are considered to be trigger areas, i.e. measurement is allowed. In the example
below, measurements will be paused when the test vehicle is in the red areas. Otherwise
measurements will be run normally.

Page 206
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

If blocked and trigger areas overlap, blocked areas outweigh the trigger areas. In the
example below, measurements will be run when the test vehicle is in the green areas.
Otherwise measurements will be paused.

Page 207
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.21 Forcing functions


Nemo Outdoor offers a set of forcing functions that are accessible through the Nemo Outdoor user
interface. In addition to these, some terminals support more forcing features that are accessible via
the mobile keypad. See the terminal-specific data sheets for more information on the forcing
features available for each terminal.

The supported forcing functions with Qualcomm-based UEs vary between different device models
and firmware and depend on the available control interfaces. All forcing functions are not supported
in all devices. The normal method for forcing to take effect requires a full device restart. A full
device reset after forcing enhances the test devices reliability. All carrier and cell locks need to
have band lock enabled (only bands from the target system may be selected) as well, otherwise the
locks will not hold. It is recommended that band lock is enabled prior to enabling carrier and cell
locks.

Supported forcing features:

System lock (GSM, WCDMA, LTE, CDMA)

Band lock (GSM, WCDMA, LTE, CDMA)

LTE carrier (EARFCN) lock

LTE cell (EARFCN+PCI) lock

The LTE cell forcing locks the device to the desired EARFCN and PCI

When device is in coverage of the locked cell, it also reports neighbor cells, but does not
camp on them

When device drops out-of-coverage from the locked cell, it does not report any cells

WCDMA cell (UARFCN+SCR) lock

The WCDMA cell forcing locks the device to the desired UARFCN and SCR

In idle state, the active set includes only the locked cell, may report neighbor cells

When out-of-coverage from the locked cell, may scan for other cells, but never camps on
them

In Cell DCH state, reports neighbor cells when instructed by the network, but does not
perform handover

When network sends ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE, the device rejects this with failure cause
configurationUnsupported

During DC-HSDPA data test, the device may use the second carrier, since the DC-HSDPA
function is not disabled. This requires that the UE is in coverage of the locked cell. When
out-of-coverage of the locked cell, the data transfer will drop

GSM cell (ARFCN) lock

The GSM cell forcing locks the device to the desired BCCH channel (ARFCN)

This is only ARFCN lock, so it is possible to camp on other BSICs that use the same
ARFCN

Frequency reuse cannot be avoided in GSM networks and the denser the network is, the
more ofter the same frequency has to be used

Page 208
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

If a network uses frequency hopping in CONNECTED mode, the device is mandated to use
another frequency as the traffic channel. In this case, the BCCH frequency still remains
as the locked ARFCN

In IDLE mode, the device only camps on the locked ARFCN and loses the service when it
moves out-of-coverage from that particular ARFCN

When out-of-coverage of the locked cell, may still decode some SI messages, but does
not camp on any other cells

6.21.1 Channel locking


You can lock test mobiles to a channel and/or scrambling code during the measurement process.
Note that even though you are locking the mobile to a certain channel in idle mode, you are actually
locking the mobile only to the base station supporting that channel at that moment if you make a
call. As the base station can carry several channels simultaneously, the connection can be
established or handed over to another channel but not to another base station. In other words, the
channel used cannot be totally controlled by the mobile as the system will assign the channel.

To lock the Nemo Outdoor test mobile to a channel:


Note that when the channel lock is activated, the Neighbor Stations window displays only
Serving Cell values.

1. When you have connected the measurement device, select the device and click the
Measurement settings button in the Devices view and select Channel Locking.

Page 209
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

2. The Detected cells table displays a list of channels that are currently visible to the device.
Click the Refresh button to update the list.

3. Select the system and channel number and/or scrambling code within the given limits (it
must be a valid channel/scrambling code number) and click the Lock button. You can also
select a channel from the Detected cells table. The button will remain pushed down
indicating that channel lock is activated. A red indicator will appear in the Device Status
view when a lock is activated.

4. Click the Unlock button in the Forcing Functions | Channel Locking dialog to release
the channel lock or select a new channel.

Page 210
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.21.2 Band locking


With the band locking functionality you can compare how the network functions with different bands
and systems. With the band lock functionality you can force the mobile to use certain bands or
system(s).

When you have connected the measurement device, select the device and click the Measurement
settings button in the Devices view and select Band Locking.

Choose the band(s) or system(s) from the list and click the Lock button. This will lock the mobile to
the band/system you have chosen. Click Close to exit the dialog.

A red indicator will appear in the Device Status view when a lock is activated. To release the band
lock, open the Band Locking dialog and click the Unlock button.

Page 211
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.21.3 Network selection


With Nemo Outdoor it is possible to manually register and deregister to and from a mobile network.
Click the Measurement Settings button in the Devices view and select Network Selection.

The Register, Deregister, and Scan functions are available only when the device is in detached
mode.

Select Manual, type in a PLMN ID, and click Register to register to a specific network. If you
select Automatic, the device will automatically select the network.

Note that if the device is registered to a network, it is recommended to deregister the


device before registering to another network. Especially when switching between
operators. Also note that all NMR devices have mobile data enabled and the devices are
attached to a network so they need to be deregistered.

Click the Scan button to scan for available networks. Note that the scanning may take several
minutes and it cannot be canceled. Select a network from the list by double-clicking the network
name and click Register. From the Device Status view you can observe the status of the device.

To switch back to Automatic mode, select Automatic and click Register.

Page 212
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.21.4 Handover control


Forcing handovers can be used to check that they work properly. You do not have to wait for the
mobile to make handovers, as you can, for example, force a handover to every neighbor cell.

Start a measurement and make a call. Open the Handover Control dialog (Measurement
settings | Handover Control). Define the channel and handover type and click OK.

The BCCH ARFCN can be used to select the broadcast control channel (1-885) you want to force
the handover to.

The BSIC field defines the Base station identification code for the target cell.

The user has three mode request commands, Normal mode, Handover forcing and Handover
suppression. If the terminal accepts the command made by the user, the corresponding button
will indicate this. If the command fails, the user is notified. It is also possible to send the same
command several times without clicking other commands (i.e. send a new Handover Forcing
command with different bias values or forced the terminal to different scr. code, or in GSM to a
different channel without first deactivating HO forcing). For example, the device can be forced to
scrambling code 6. Once the terminal is locked to scrambling code 6, the user can set a new target
cell and press the Handover forcing button again.

The Target cell settings and Non-Target cell settings fields enable the user to define 3G offsets, i.e.
enhance target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP, and degrade non-target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP)

Page 213
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

During Normal mode, forcing is disabled and the terminal performs 2G and 3G handovers
normally.

The system field shown in the Target cell field shows in real time whether the serving system is
GSM or WCDMA. When the serving system is GSM, the target cell and non-target cell settings are
disabled. In case the current serving system is GSM, but the wanted target cell is in WCDMA, band
locking can be used first to lock the terminal to WCDMA.

Page 214
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Once target cell settings including biasing information are defined by the user, handover mode can
be changed to Handover forcing mode by pressing the button. Handover forcing is done by biasing
target and non-target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP values. Therefore it is also possible to bias the current
active cell. For example, in the example below active set includes only one scrambling code. By
pressing the Handover forcing button, the terminal reports biasing Ec/N0 and RSCP values as set
by the user. When the mode is changed back to Normal mode the terminal reports unbiased
values.

In the next example regarding Forced 3G handover and measurement report modification, the
terminal active set includes scrambling code 7 with Ec/N0 value -3.3dB shown as a brown curve.
Scrambling code 5 and 6 are seen in the monitored set with colors blue and green. Scrambling code
6 is selected to be a target cell.

Once the button is pressed, scrambling code number 6 is active with Ec/N0 value -4.5dB.
Scrambling codes seen in the monitored set are decreased -10dB. Scrambling code 7 is seen with
Ec/N0 value -14.0dB (brown) and scrambling code 5 (green) is seen with Ec/N0 value -23.7dB.

Page 215
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

This situation is active as long as forcing/biasing is enabled. The device sends measurement reports
to the network with biased values.

Once the mode is changed back to normal, the terminal starts reporting unbiased values.

Page 216
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

When the Handover suppression button is pressed, the terminal is not allowed to do handovers
to other cells. It should be noted that target cell biasing can be done only with WCDMA. Biasing/
measurement report message modification is not possible with GSM at the moment. You can use
this feature, for example, to find the edge of a cell by stopping the handovers from taking place
when driving away from a base station.

Note that with scripts you can also perform handover forcing from one system to another.
See chapter Making script files.

Page 217
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.21.5 Cell barring

During the measurement you can select if you wish to access only cells that are accessible to all
end users (Accept), all cells; that is, also cells that are barred (Ignore), and only barred cells
(Reverse).

The Cell Barring dialog is accessed by clicking the Measurement settings button in the Devices
view and choosing Cell Barring.

6.21.6 Set terminal radio on/off (airplane mode)


It is possible to set the terminal radio on and off by selecting the device and clicking the
Measurement settings button in the Devices view and selecting Set Terminal Radio On/Off.

The Device Status view will display a red indicator when the terminal radio is off.

Page 218
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.21.7 AMR codec forcing


This feature is available with Qualcomm-based devices.

It is possible to force a device to use a certain AMR codec mode. For example, when a UE is forced
to the WCDMA AMR WB codec, it can freely use any WB AMR codec from 6.6 kbps to 23.85 kbps..

The codecs are enabled/disabled from the Measurement Properties Measurement page.

6.22 Cell testing


The surrounding cells of a location can be tested through an automated list of test calls that are
locked to a cell at a time. The Cell Testing dialog is accessed by selecting the device and clicking
the Measurement settings button in the Devices view

and choosing Cell Testing. You can also select Measurement | <device name> | Cell Testing.
After defining all the test settings, click Start Testing.

Page 219
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Phone number defines the phone number that is called at the outset of the cell test. During the
call the neighbor list which defines the cells to be tested is updated. This is necessary since if the
cell from which the cell testing is performed is a strong one, without this call the neighbour list may
remain empty.

Test cases defines whether the user wishes to perform Voice call or Packet call testing or both
by selecting Voice & Packet in the drop-down menu. If the user selects both, the test starts with a
voice connection attempt, and after that the test continues with the attempt to create a PDP
context with the cell. The choice of test case also affects the displayed fields in this dialog. For
example, if Voice call is selected, no Packet call settings are displayed

RX level threshold: if the cell to be tested is a GSM cell, only cells stronger than the value defined
here will be included in the test

Ec/N0 threshold: if the cell to be tested is a UMTS cell, only cells that are stronger than this value
will be included in the test

Maximum number of calls defines the maximum number of calls that are made during the test.

Voice call settings | Maximum number of retries defines the maximum number of retries to a
cell if no voice connection is formed. After the maximum voice connection attempts Nemo Outdoor
continues to the next cell or to packet call testing

Packet connection settings | Maximum number of retries defines the access point name for
the packet connection and the maximum number of retries for the connection attempts to a cell.
After the maximum voice connection attempts Nemo Outdoor continues to the next cell

Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file

Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing.

The Test results page shows the progress of the test. The green color indicates successful
attempts, and the number the number of attempts.

Page 220
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.23 RF validation
In order to prevent measurements with faulty antenna and RF cables, users can perform RF cross-
checking with the test devices connected to Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Invex. This can be done using
the RF offset parameter, RF test feature, level check, or scanner configuration check.

6.23.1 RF test
With the RF test feature, users can validate all test devices before starting measurements. The RF
test gives detailed information about the RF performance of the connected test devices, UEs and
scanners.

RF test can be activated when more than one test device is connected to Nemo Outdoor. Select RF
Test from the Measurement Settings menu of a device.

Page 221
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

In the RF Test dialog, select the test devices to be validated. By default all devices are selected.

Select the Stop test manually option or define the Test duration in minutes.

Define the Alarm limits for the various parameters. A 3dB value is used by default.

Click Start to run the RF test. The test will be stopped either manually or after the user-defined
time. Manual stopping mode is useful, for example, if RF validation is performed by driving the test
route before the actual measurements.

Average and max average field strength values are calculated during the test for all serving cells
measured. Test results are shown for each test device included in the RF validation. Each test
device reports the serving cell information along the average field strength value for each serving
cell it was camping on during the test. The Max. Avg. value is the maximum average value reported
by one of the test devices measured for a particular cell. The max average value is compared to
average results reported by other devices for the same cell.

When the measurement is stopped, the dialog will display a passed/failed grade for each device.

Page 222
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

To see more detailed results from the devices, click the Save Results button. The RF test results can
be stored to a separate .csv file.

Page 223
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.23.2 Scanner and UE level check


With the level check users can compare field strength values measured by a scanner and test UEs.
The data is displayed in a table grid. This helps in detecting possible antenna and cable defects, but
level check does not trigger any warnings. The comparison is done real time during the
measurement and can be viewed also during playback. Custom windows are available for GSM,
UMTS and LTE.

GSM (matching ARFCN)

RxLev sub of the test UE

RX level (ref.) measured by scanner

RX level (delta). Difference between test UE RX level and scanner RX level

UMTS (matching UARFCN and scr. code)

RSCP of the test UE

RSCP (ref.) measured by scanner

RSCP (delta). Difference between UE RSCP and scanner RSCP

LTE (matching EARFCN and scr. code)

RSCP of the test UE

RSCP (ref.) measured by scanner

RSCP (delta). Difference between UE RSCP and scanner RSCP

Page 224
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.23.3 Scanner configuration check


With the scanner configuration check user is notified during a measurement if a scanner is not
configured to scan all the serving cell channels measured by the UEs configured in the system.

6.24 Missing neighbor detection


Realtime missing neighbor detection can be performed with the possibility to detect both
GSM/WCDMA and CDMA missing neighbors at the same time. Missing neighbor measurements are
also supported on some Nokia terminals. You have three options in which to perform missing
neighbor detection:

with a mobile terminal supporting missing neighbor detection

a scanner

a scanner and a mobile

Each cell has list of neighboring intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-system cells. A terminal
sees/measures only cells in the neighbor list, whereas a scanner measures all available cells.
Missing neighbor detection is based on comparing scanner measurements with the neighbor list of
the mobile. Hence, a possible missing neighbor refers to a cell that is not in the neighbor list of the
mobile at a given time, but is detected/measured by the scanner. In mobile only missing neighbor
measurements, the mobile is able to detect also missing neighbors through the missing neighbor
detection functionality.

6.24.1 Missing neighbor detection with a mobile


1. Connect your mobile phone to Nemo Outdoor.

2. In the Devices view, select the device and click the Measurement control button .
Select Frequency Scanning Properties. Select BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor
detection in the Frequency scanning view. Next, click on Select Channels.

Page 225
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Note that both BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor detection need to be selected and
Top-N option deselected.

3. Select the channels for scanning in the Select Channels dialog.

4. Click OK and OK.

5. Start the device by pressing on the work online button if you have not done this already,
and select Measurement control | Start Single Shot Scanning or Start
Continuous Scanning.

6. Once the selected scans have been performed, Nemo Outdoor compares the scanning
results to the neighbor list of the serving cell before scanning was initiated and reports
possible detected missing neighbors.

Page 226
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.24.2 Missing neighbor detection with a scanner/scanner and mobile


You will need a scanner or a scanner and a mobile. If you are performing missing neighbor
detection with a scanner only, the scanner needs either of the following options enabled: GSM Layer
3 or GSM/WCDMA decoding. Note that missing neighbor detection using a scanner only is
not available for CDMA/EVDO.

A scanner scans all possible pilots whereas a mobile scans only channels that are on its neighbor
list. Nemo Outdoor compares these two measurements and, based on the data, reports the
neighbor channels that are seen by the scanner but are not in the mobile's neighbor list. You can
observe the missing neighbors in a bar graph and also view some important network parameters,
such as, difference to strongest, Ec/N0, and RSCP related to the missing neighbors.

Connect a mobile and a scanner to Nemo Outdoor. Configure the devices so that they are
measuring the same frequency and channels.

From Measurement | <device name>, select Missing Neighbor to open the following dialog.
The field displays the scanner(s) used. The user can also set a minimum RX level threshold for
missing neighbor. If the measured RX level is below the threshold, the channel is not detected as a
missing neighbor. Click on Enable to start the missing neighbor detection.

In GSM Missing Neighbor detection, the maximum number of missing neighbors is 32. However,
note that it is recommended to use default values to prevent false missing neighbor detection
results.

Number of missing neighbors: Max. 32, default 3.

RX level: -50- -110dBm, default -95dBm

Page 227
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Open a bar graph, for example, with a Missing Neighbor Ec/N0 layer (Data | Bar Graph | New,
click the New Layer button and select the parameter in the Y box). The bar graph with the
selected parameter will display the missing neighbor channel(s).

6.25 Pilot pollution analysis


Available for UMTS, CDMA and EVDO networks, Pilot Pollution Analysis measurements can be
performed in real time with Nemo Outdoor by using test terminals or a scanning receiver. In a pilot
pollution situation there are more active/monitored pilots than a handset can measure, or there is
no clear dominance for any pilots in the area. The pilot signal is used to distinguish cells in the
network from one another. Pilot pollution analysis is done based on CELL MEASUREMENT events,
and analysis is always active. The user can define thresholds for pilot pollution analysis via Nemo
Outdoors UI. Pilot pollution is detected when all the criterias match.

Right-click on the device in the Devices view and select Pilot Pollution Analysis.

The user can define thresholds for pilot pollution analysis via Nemo Outdoor user interface.

Page 228
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Ec/N0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -12dB. Pilot
pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/N0 value is below -12dB.

Ec/I0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set to -
12dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/I0 value is below -12dB.

RSCP active set best above threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -95dBm.
Pilot pollution analysis is done when the reported active set best RSCP value is above -95dBm.

RSCP (Ec) active set best above threshold (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set to -
95dBm. Pilot pollution analysis is done when reported active set best RSCP value is above -95dBm

Polluter level window from best active set cell (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -
6dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the Ec/N0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB from
the best active set Ec/N0 value.

Polluter level window from best active set cell (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set
to -6dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when Ec/I0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB from
the best active set Ec/I0 value.

Pilot count threshold (for UMTS): The default value is set to 3. The number of cells that are
within the user-defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell. The pilot count includes
active and monitored sets. For example, pilot pollution analysis is performed when more than three
pilots are detected within the user-defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell.

Pilot count threshold (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set to 3. The number of cells
that are within the user-defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set best cell. Pilot count includes
active and neighbor sets. For example, pilot pollution analysis is performed when more than three
pilots are detected within the user-defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set best cell.

Start recording by clicking on the Start recording button .

6.25.1 UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone


Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own, called
CELLPOLLUTION.

The event includes the following information:

Source system

Source band

Source channel number

Pilot pollution scrambling code

Pilot pollution Ec/N0

Pilot pollution RSCP

Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)

Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)

NOTE! Cell site file (BTS file) is not used with scanning receivers with Nemo Outdoor at
the moment.

Page 229
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time to happen, and the results are based on
earlier cell measurement events.

Page 230
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.25.2 UMTS pilot pollution analysis based on scanner measurements


Ec/N0 values for pilots are less than -12dB

Ec/N0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value

6.25.3 CDMA/EVDO pilot pollution analysis - Mobile phones


Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own, called
CELLPOLLUTION.

The event includes the following information:

Source system

Source band

Source channel number

Pilot pollution scrambling code

Pilot pollution Ec/I0

Pilot pollution RSCP

Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)

Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)

Page 231
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time to happen, and the results are based on
earlier cell measurement events.

6.25.4 CDMA/EVDO pilot pollution analysis - Scanners


Ec/I0 values for pilots are less than -12dB

Ec/I0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value

6.26 GSM interference analysis


In GSM mobile communication networks, system capacity is often limited by co-channel
interference. This is because of the surrounding cells using the same carrier frequency, or adjacent
channel interference when surrounding cells use a channel too close to the serving cell used by a
terminal. The GSM recommendations state that reference interference will be achieved at a
minimum C/I margin of 9 dB for co-channel interference, and that the margin is -9 dB C/I for
adjacent channel interference with voice. With packet switched data connection C/I margin should
be much higher. Interference source can be a BCCH or TCH channel, or it can be also from out of
band in some circumstances. ETSI 05.05 requirements for the interference rejection are:

Co-channel channel interference: z = 9 dB

200 kHz adjacent channel: z = -9dB

400 kHz adjacent channel: z = -41dB

600 kHz adjacent channel: z = -49dB

Page 232
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

GSM co-channel and adjacent channel analysis is done in real time during the measurement and
playback with Nemo Outdoor. The user must enable interference analysis similarly, as with, e.g.
missing neighbor detection. Interference detection is done based on GSM terminal and GSM scanner
measurements and these measurements are combined together. GSM terminal continuously reports
RX level, RX quality and C/I values. With RX level and RX quality, the sub values are used to make
correct analysis in case DTX downlink is used.

In idle mode C/I and RX level values are used to trigger interference analysis from the BCCH
channel. A decent RX level with a simultaneous poor C/I value is a clear sign of an interference
situation. Once triggering is done, the power of BCCH channel used by a terminal is measured also
by a scanning receiver. BCCH decoding must be enabled with a scanning receiver to decode BSIC
information. Power of adjacent channels are (+/ - 1) is also measured by the scanning receiver. It
should be noted that the C/I value is not available with all test terminals in idle mode. Due to this
limit interference analysis in idle mode cannot be performed with all GSM test terminals.

During dedicated mode, RX level sub, RX quality sub and C/I reported by terminal are observed. C/I
value measured by the terminal is not available all the time in dedicated mode. For example, when
AMR speech codec is used, the terminal reports the LQE (Link Quality Estimate) value to the
network. During this time the C/I value reported by the terminal is not valid. Please note that all
test terminals do not report C/I value. Triggering points in dedicated mode are:

RX level sub and RX quality sub, OR RX level sub and C/I

These two combinations are observed all the time during the measurement to trigger interference
analysis. Analysis is based on TCH channel numbers if valid data is available, or BCCH if no TCH
channel data is found. If frequency hopping is used, C/I average value is used. The user can define
triggering limits via the Nemo Outdoor user interface. Default values are:

RX Level Sub is above or equal user-defined threshold (default value -90 dBm)

RX Quality Sub is above or equal user defined threshold (default value 4)

Channel average C/I is below or equal user defined threshold (default value 10 dB)

The following data is extracted from the terminal and written to the terminal measurement file:

Terminal serving channel number

or TCH channels in case of frequency hopping

Cell ID

Page 233
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

RX level sub

RX quality sub

C/I if available

For each terminal serving channel number X, the following data is extracted from scanner
measurements and written to terminal measurement file:

Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel X

Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel (X-1)

Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel (X+1)

Results are written to IANALYSIS event and can be displayed in different views, for example, in a
table grid and bar graph. If BTS file is used also cell names for the serving and interfering cells can
be seen during the measurement and playback. Nemo Outdoor includes predefined custom windows
for GSM interference analysis.

Page 234
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.27 Band scan


With band scanning all specified channels are scanned for the selected band and technology and the
strongest measured identifiers (CDMA PN, EVDO PN, WCDMA SC, LTE Cell ID) for every valid
channel of that technology type are reported. Signal strength and signal quality are reported for
each identified channel. This feature is useful in areas where broadcasted technologies and bands
are unknown. Please note that the supported band scan features are device-specific.

To start a band scan, right click the scanner item in the Devices view and select Band Scan.

Available technologies and bands supported by the scanner are shown under Scan settings. Please
note that only licensed technologies (systems) are shown.

Select the technologies and bands that you want to be scanned and define the threshold levels for
the parameters available. Finally press the Start Scan button. With the default threshold values it
takes approximately two minutes and 30 seconds to scan GSM 900, 1800 and WCDMA 2100 bands.
The scanning rate can be increased by adjusting the threshold values.

Page 235
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Page 236
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Scanning results are displayed on the Scan results page. It is possible to save the results to a text
file (.csv).

6.28 Timeslot testing


This functionality is available for certain GSM and GSM/UMTS dual-mode mobiles only.

With Nemo Outdoor, it is possible to test the timeslots of any particular channel.

Select Measurement | <device name> | Timeslot Testing and the Timeslot Test Configuration
dialog will be opened.

Phone number defines the test call number. This must be a valid number.

Run test until completed option keeps the test running until all the timeslots have been tested.

Note that if you select the Run test until completed option, the test may continue
indefinitely. Click the Stop Testing button to interrupt the timeslot test.

The Specify call duration option enables you to define a time in seconds that the call will last.

Page 237
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

In the Channel Settings | BCCH channel you define the Channel (BCCH) that you want to test.
Timeslots used by BCCH refers to the timeslots that are used for system messaging and therefore
cannot be accessed with mobiles. Click on the button to enter the Select Channel dialog.

Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file

Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing.

Page 238
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

On the Test results page you can view the progress of the test. Selecting timeslots will exclude
them from the test, for example, in the case they are already reserved for data testing. Green color
indicates channels and their timeslots that have been called, and the number in the slot the number
of calls made in the timeslot. In the table you can see a list of all the TCHs of the selected channel
and their timeslots. There is a yellow frame around the timeslot that was accessed during the
previous call. Those white timeslots that were not tested will turn red. This happens, for example, if
the user stops the testing.

The Number of Call Attempts field tells how many calls have been made so far.

Click the Stop testing button to interrupt the timeslot test.

When there are no more white slots left, i.e. all time slots except for the ones that were excluded
from the test by selecting them (grey), the measurement will stop on its own.

6.29 Viewing graphs


There are several types of graphs in Nemo Outdoor. There are some premade custom windows of
each graph type that offer easy access to relevant network parameters. See chapter Custom
windows for opening custom windows. Also premade Workspaces contain relevant data views for
different kinds of data. To open an empty graph, select Data Windows | [graph type] | New.

It is possible to view selected parameters in graphs by drag and dropping them in it. Click on a
parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. Move your mouse pointer on
top of a parameter in the Parameters view, and the tooltip will display more information about that
particular parameter.

Page 239
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Parameters can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press
down the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the Parameters view. After this,
right-click on the wanted parameter from the parameters tree and select the graph type in which
you want the parameter to be opened.

The options listed in the graph popup menu will be introduced next.

6.29.1 Graph popup menu


Right-click on the graph to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the
graph.

Page 240
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.29.1.1 Custom Window Properties

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select
groups for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are
available for each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be
available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE
measurement.

6.29.1.2 Save custom window changes


Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.

6.29.1.3 Save as new custom window


Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu.
The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a name for the custom
window and define the custom window groups.

6.29.1.4 Save as image


Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a .jpg image.

6.29.1.5 Move view to


With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. See
chapter The ribbon contains all Nemo Outdoor commands. The commands are arranged in tabs.

Under the Nemo Outdoor button, you will find more commands.

Page 241
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

View groups for more information on view groups.

Page 242
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.29.1.6 Graph Properties


Right-click on a graph window and choose Properties from the popup menu to open the Graph
Properties dialog. You can also open it by clicking the Graph Properties dialog button . Please
note that the contents of this dialog varies depending on the graph type (line, bar, scatter,
spectrum).

Select Yes in the Show value labels field to view the parameter value as a numerical label above
the bar in the graph.

Value label placement defines wether the value is displayed on top of the bar or on the bar.

Axes define the parameter for the left and right axes in the bar graph. If you select Default, the
axis changes depending on the active layer. You can also define different parameters for the axes.
This is especially useful if you have two layers open and they have different scales.

Automatic bar scale option is available for bar graphs. When the option is set to Yes, the X-scale
automatically scales to the displayed data.

Select Yes in the Hide panels in full screen mode if you want panels to disappear once you enter
full screen mode.

Page 243
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.29.1.7 Edit Parameters


With the Edit Parameters tool you can define what parameters are shown in the graph side panel, in
the Values view. This functionality is particularly useful for viewing textual parameters.

6.29.1.8 Side panel


Right-click on a graph window and choose Side Panel from the popup menu. You can also open it by
clicking the Side Panel dialog button .

6.29.1.8.1 Layers
Select Layers in the popup menu to view the Layers view in the graph side panel.

6.29.1.8.2 Values
Select Values in the popup menu to view the Values view in the graph side panel.

6.29.1.9 Full screen


Selecting the Full screen item in the popup menu will display Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode.

Page 244
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.29.2 Zoom - Scatter graph


To zoom in on a scatter graph, drag your mouse diagonally from either corner with the green dot
towards the corners with the red dots. To zoom out, do the same in reverse, dragging the mouse
from a red dot to a green dot.

Page 245
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.29.3 Graph side panel Layers


The Layers side panel displays a list of the current layers in the data view. At the bottom of the
panel you will find tools for hiding and removing individual layers, adding new layers and for
changing the order of the layers.

Right-click on the Layers view to view the Layers popup menu.

Page 246
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.29.3.1 Grouping layers


The New Group, Rename Group, Remove Group, Move Group Up/Down and Group Similar
Layers items are used in editing and organizing layer groups. Layer groups can be used to group
parameters with the same unit and scale. Parameters in the same group will be displayed in the
same scales and the different groups will be stacked in the graph.

The Layers side panel displays all parameters added in the graph.

Page 247
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Righ-click on the Layers side panel and select Group Similar Layers. The parameters will be
organized into groups based on the parameter unit.

Groups can be removed, renamed and moved up and down. You can also create a new group and
drag and drop parameters into the group.

6.29.3.2 New layer


The New Layer command creates a new layer.

Select a parameter in the Y or X field. You can also assign the parameter into a layer group.

Define the layer properties, such as, line style and color. See chapter Layer Properties for more
detailed information. Click Add to add the new layer and Close to exit the dialog.

Page 248
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.29.3.3 New function layer


Function layers can be used to implement sum operations on parameters, such as LTE PDSCH bit
rate for Pcell and Scell. The sum operation is performed for the values of a single source layer.
Select the source layer as the Function source and define the layer properties, such as line style
and color. See chapter Layer Properties for more detailed information. Click OK to add the new
layer.

6.29.3.4 Hide layer


The Hide Layer button hides the selected layer.

6.29.3.5 Remove layer


The Remove Layer button removes the selected layer.

Page 249
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.29.3.6 Layer Properties dialog


Click on the Layer Properties icon to enter the Layer Properties dialog. The dialog can also be
accessed by double-clicking a layer in the panel. The Layer Properties dialog can be used to edit the
selected layer.

Line width defines the line thickness in pixels.

Show extended values list displays more detailed information about the parameter.

Stairs defines whether the line is drawn connecting two points using two lines (giving a "stairs"
appearance) or one straight line.

Sort(Y): Support for data sorting based on y-value in bar graph. Data can be sorted based on
descending or ascending order.

Draw as area defines whether the area below the line is filled.

Area transparency defines transparency value used in filling the area (0 = totally opaque, 100 =
totally transparent).

Averaging refers to whether moving average is used in drawing the line.

There is an option to manually configure graph layer colors. This feature can be used with line and
bar graphs. The Color field determines whether the graph line is colored with a Classic
(algorithmic) or fixed color set, or whether a color set based on parameter values is used (see
chapter Graph layer color configuration).

Window size defines the number of values to be averaged.

Automatic scale the minimum and maximum values of the scale are defined automatically based
on the minimum and maximum values visible on the screen.

Page 250
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Use value scale defaults: the minimum and maximum values of the scale can be defined by the
user, so the maximum and minimum values are not dependent on the values that are displayed.
Note that if you want to select No in the drop-down menu, Automatic scale also needs to be set to
No.

Minimum defines the minimum value of the scale, if Automatic scale is set to No. If Automatic
scale is set to Yes, this is not used

Maximum defines the maximum value of the scale if Automatic scale is set to No. If Automatic
scale is set to Yes, this is not used.

Minimum and maximum threshold define the maximum and minimum values at which the user-
defined limits for a measurement result is set. Horizontal lines help determine if the value goes
below or above the minimum and maximum values.

Depending on the parameter, it is possible to define various filters:

Channel: list of channels whose measurement values are shown (Ch = ch1 or ch2 or ch 3
or AND Pilot 0 p1 or p2 or o3 or...). If the list is empty, no filtering is used

Pilot: list of channels and pilots whose measurement values are shown (Ch = ch1 or ch2 or
ch 3 or AND Pilot 0 p1 or p2 or o3 or...). If the list is empty, appropriate filtering is not
used so that it is possible to filter only channels, only pilots or both

Frequency: list of frequencies whose measurement values are shown (Freq = f1 or f2 or f3


or); if the list is empty, no filtering is used

TopN: only N best measurement results are shown based on a defined parameter. If 0, no
filtering is used

TopN(Y): Support for best TOP-N filtering based on y-value in line and bar graphs. E.g.,
only the best two values can be seen in the line or bar graph

BottomN(y): This can be done by selecting number of topN and select sorting order. E.g.,
below bottom three RX levels are shown.

Some of the graph types support data tips. Hover the mouse cursor over the graph line or bar. The
data tip will display information from that point of time.

Parameters with instantaneous values display points instead of a line in a graph. Such parameters
are, for example, RACH TX Power, RACH Preamble Step and RACH Preamble Count. Such graphs
include also the following layer properties.

Point style allows you to select among various icons such as a triangle or a cross to display the
instantaneous values in the graph

Point size defines the size of the points in pixels in the graph

Point transparency defines the degree of point transparency.

Page 251
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.29.3.7 Layer device selection


The Device Selection dialog enables you to view and reorganize layers by device. Layers can be
reorganized easily by simply dragging and dropping them from one device to another. The Device
Selection dialog is a convenient way to change a device for several layers at once instead of using
layer properties dialog for each layer separately.

Right-click a parameter in the Values side panel and select Parameter Device Selection.

Page 252
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.29.4 Graph side panel Values and parameter


The Values view shows the layer parameter values at a specific point during the measurement
defined by the position of the cursor in the graph window. Select a layer in the Layers view, and
double-click on any parameter in the Values view to view the parameter properties.

Page 253
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.29.5 Graph layer color configuration


Nemo Outdoor offers an option to manually configure graph layer colors. This feature can be used
with line and bar graphs, and is very useful when observing a certain parameter or parameters, as
different colors can be assigned to different channels, scrambling codes, cell ID, etc. First, add
parameters to the graph by dragging them from the parameter tree. Next, double-click on a layer in
the Layers side panel to enter the Layer Properties dialog.

If you select the Classic option for coloring the graph, Nemo Outdoor will pick up the color
automatically based on the device.

If you choose Fixed color, click to enter the Colors dialog. Define the fixed color by selecting it in
the Standard or Custom page, or define the RGB for the color. Click OK. The graph will be colored
based on the fixed color you selected.

Page 254
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

If you select the Algorithm option for coloring the graph, Nemo Outdoor will pick up the color
automatically based, for example, on channel and scrambling code.

Selecting Color set in the Color method drop-down menu will activate the Color set parameter
and Color set fields.

Page 255
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Select a parameter in the Color set parameter drop-down menu, and a color set in the Color set
drop-down menu. Note that only layer-specific parameters will be available in the Color set
parameter menu.

Page 256
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

To edit the color set in question, click on Edit Color Set.. button. It will lead you to the Color Set
Properties dialog. Here you can edit the color set selected. See chapter Color Set Editor for more
information.

The parameter will be colored based on its values in the graph.

Page 257
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

In the picture below you will see a bar graph colored based on BSIC numbers. Each BSIC is
presented with its own color; the channels without BSIC information appear in blue color.

Similarly, the picture below presents a bar graph where bars are colored based on BSIC numbers.
All channels with BSIC information appear in green color, and channels without BSIC information
are shown with black color.

Page 258
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

The example below shows a bar graph in which bars are colored based on channel numbers.

Page 259
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.29.6 Spectrum graphs


Spectrum graphs are useful for displaying spectrum scanning results.

By adding markers (vertical lines) on top of the window, it is possible to see the RX level for certain
frequencies shown on the side panel. Markers can be also edited, added or removed via edit marker
window.

With the peak value indicator tool you can visualize the peak value of the selected parameter for
each frequency. Open the Layer Properties dialog and select Yes in the Draw peak line field.

The peak value line will be drawn with the selected color. In the image below, the peak line is
drawn in red. To reset the peak line, right-click on the graph and select Reset Peak Lines.

Page 260
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Page 261
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.29.7 Color grid graphs


Color grid graphs can be used for visualizing data as a two-dimensional color grid where the X-axis
represents time and the Y-axis represents the identifier of the value to be plotted (channel, cell,
etc.). The Y-axis scale is configurable. Color of the cell in the X/Y position represents the value.
Color grid graphs are especially useful for displaying scanner data.

6.29.8 How to read MIMO parameters in a bar graph


In the bar below, graph CQI can be seen for both antenna ports. CQI for antenna port 0 is on the
top and bottom CQI value (CQI2) is for the second antenna port. For example, in the example
below three percentage of time (200ms) CQI value 6 has been used with antenna port 0 and CQI
value 3 has been used for antenna port 1. Bars are colored based on CQI type to indentify used CQI
type. CQI type A is shown in green and CQI type B is shown in red.

If more detailed information about the link adaptation is needed, it can be seen from the HSDPA
link adaptation information table grid. Distribution is shown for both antenna ports from the last
sample duration which is set to 200ms. E.g., four percentage of the time during the sample
duration modulation for antenna port 0 has been 16QAM with transport block size 14411 bits and
for the second antenna port 1 modulation was 16QAM with transport block size 12266 bits.

Page 262
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.30 Viewing grids


Along with the graph windows, the grid tables offer you useful information about measurement
events, such as statistics from the current measurement, QoS parameters, Layer2 and Layer 3
messages (the selection depends on the technology measured), and packet capture data. All events
can be decoded by double-clicking on the event row. The decoded message is displayed in a
separate window. Alternatively, you can right-click on an event row and from the popup menu
select Decode Message. To open several decoded message windows, select Decode Message in
New Window option.

To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet decoding
function in Measurement Properties | Measurement before performing data measurements.
Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the
measurement, and this file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same folder when
viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor. This
requires Microsoft Network Monitor to be installed. Please see chapter IP packet capturing for more
information.

An empty grid table is opened by selecting Data Windows | [Grid Type] | New. If you select one
of the ready-made custom windows and you have multiple devices connected to Nemo Outdoor,
you need to select which device(s) you would like to view in the grid from the Select Device(s) to
View dialog. In most grids you only view one device in a grid at a time. Open several grid windows
to view multiple devices at the same time. However, in the Parameters grids you can view several
devices simultaneously as separate columns.

Page 263
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

You can also drag and drop parameters from the parameter tree into grids. Click on the parameter
and drag it in the grid.

6.30.1 Find function in signaling grid based on decoded message


You can use the Find functionality in signaling grids to find message(s) with a specific string in its
decoded message. Press Ctrl + F in the grid view, select the Search decoded message option and
type the search string in the Search string field. The matching message is highlighted.

Page 264
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.30.2 Grid popup menu


Right-click on the grid to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the
grid. Note that the contents of the menu vary depending on the grid type.

6.30.2.1 Custom Window Properties dialog

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select
groups for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are
available for each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be
available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE
measurement.

Page 265
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.30.2.2 Save custom window changes


Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.

6.30.2.3 Save as new custom window


With Save As New Custom Window you can save a new custom window. Selecting this item will
open the Custom Window - Properties dialog.

6.30.2.4 Move view to


With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. See
chapter The ribbon contains all Nemo Outdoor commands. The commands are arranged in tabs.

Under the Nemo Outdoor button, you will find more commands.

Page 266
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

View groups for more information on view groups.

6.30.2.5 Automatic scrolling


Select the Automatic Scrolling option in order to make the grid view scroll as the measurement
progresses.

6.30.2.6 Add/remove separator


In Parameters grids you can add empty lines (separators) to make the view easier to read. Select
Remove Separator to delete an empty line from the grid.

6.30.2.7 Open
Open allows you to open the selected parameter or statistic in another view (line graph, table grid,
map, etc.). This item is available only with parameters and statistics grids.

Page 267
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.30.2.8 Event-based grid color configuration


To make grids more clear, you can color events in a grid based on the event name, event ID, or a
string in the message. Right-click on a grid, and select Configure Colors from the popup menu.

In the Grid Color Configuration dialog define a color set for each event. You can set the text color
and background color. The quickest way to define the color sets is to click the Use Defaults button.

Page 268
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Click Edit to view the Color Set Properties dialog. Make sure that the color set type is string.
Here you can also add more events to the color set through Add

In the String Properties dialog specify the name of the event in the Text field and select the color
code for it. If you want, you can also write a description for the string text in the Description field.

Page 269
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Click OK. You can see color-coded events in the grid data view. Each color corresponds to a certain
type of event, defined in the Color Set Properties dialog.

6.30.2.9 Grid color configuration based on decoded message in grids


Messages and Events grids can be colored based on a string in the decoded message. In this case,
you need to create a new color set for the string. In the Grid Color Configuration dialog, select New
in the Text color set field.

Page 270
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

In the Color Set Properties dialog, type a name for the new color set. Select string as the color
set type. Click Add In the String Properties dialog type in the string that will be colored. Click
OK and return to the grid.

All messages with sysInfoType2 in its decoded message will be colored with the Decoded message
color set.

Page 271
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.30.2.10 Grid color configuration for parameter grids


Grids can be made clearer through colors. Open a parameters grid from Data Windows | Grid |
New Parameters Grid.

Right-click on the grid and select Configure Colors. In the Grid Color Configuration dialog click
Use Defaults to quickly assign colors to the different parameters. If you want to create custom
color sets, select New in the color set field and make the changes in the Color Set Properties dialog.
See chapter Color Set Editor for more information.

Parameters with assigned color sets are colored according to their value.

6.30.2.11 Configure filters/quick filters


Another method to organize Events grids is to use filters. By using filters, only the selected
messages will be displayed. Right-click on a grid view and select Configure Filters from the popup
menu

Page 272
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

The Grid Filter Configuration dialog is opened.

Select the Showing all option to display all events in the grid window as default. Select the Hiding
all option from the drop-down menu to hide all events in the grid window as default. If you would
like to view one or more messages of a selected type and hide others, select hiding all lines. If you
would like to hide one or more messages of a selected type and view others, select showing all
lines.

You can add a filter rule for the grid by clicking on the plus button. A conditional row appears
giving you options based on which the grid filtering takes place.

Page 273
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

It is possible to set filtering rules for message name, subchannel and decoded text. In addition,
you can select a parameter in the Select Parameter dialog which you can access through the
Other Parameter item in the filter target popup menu.

The minus icon removes a row next to it from the list. Alternatively, you can delete all filters by
right-clicking on a grid and selecting Quick Filter and Remove All Filters from the popup menu.

Page 274
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

The Quick Filter menu offers a shortcut to defining filter rules for messages. Right-click on a row in
the grid and select Quick Filter from the popup menu.

You can choose to hide the respective message and all similar messages either according to the
Event (Hide this Event), subchannel (Hide This Subchannel) or according to the message text
(Hide This Message). All messages with the selected event, subchannel name or message text will
be hidden. In the same way, you can choose to display messages of the selected type only. Select
Remove All Filters to delete all filter rules.

When filtering is enabled, the text Filtering will appear in the title bar.

6.30.2.12 Create notification


Select the Create Notification item to create a new notification matching the selected event. For
more information, see chapter Notification Configuration.

6.30.2.13 Decode message


This function will open the selected event row in a decoded form. You can also decode messages by
double-clicking on the message row.

In the message decoding grid you can use the Show Next Message and Show Previous
Message grid toolbar buttons to move to the previous/next message. If you move forward or
back in the message decoding grid, use the Go to Message button to move to the same
message in the messages grid. Click the Copy to Clipboard button to copy the contents of the
message decoding grid as text to clipboard.

With certain events such as cell measurement (CELLMEAS), it is also possible to arrange the
contents of the decoded message in three different ways.

The Format as list arranges the contents of a grids measurement results in a list. The Format
as horizontal table arranges the contents in the form of a horizontal table with columns, and
the Format as vertical table arranges the contents in a vertical table. The search field in the
decoded text window enables the user to find a string in the decoded message window.

Page 275
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.30.2.14 Decode message in new window


This function enables you to have several decoded message windows open at the same time.

6.30.2.15 Automatic decode


The Automatic Decode function opens up a window which displays the currently selected or latest
message in decoded form.

6.30.2.16 Save - Grid


The Save command allows you to save a selected event row as a text file (.txt). If you select the
Decoded Text option, the decoded event text is saved in a text file. You can also save the entire
grid window as an image file (.jpg). From Events grids, you can export data into a MapInfo Tab-File
(see chapter MapInfo Tab-file export for more information) or into a CSV file.

6.30.2.17 Copy
The Copy command allows you to copy a selected event row and paste to another application as
text or as decoded text. If you select the Decoded Text option, the decoded event text is copied
on the clipboard. You can also copy the entire grid window as an image and paste to another
application.

6.30.2.18 Find
The Find command allows you to search through the measurement file opened in the grid.

Page 276
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Type in the Search string field what you are looking for. Define if the search results should match
case and if the search should be applied to whole words only. You can also limit the search to
decoded messages only. The matches are highlighted in the grid one by one.

Page 277
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.30.2.19 Grid Properties dialog


Right-click on a grid table and select Properties from the popup menu. The Grid Properties dialog
is opened.

Note that the appearance of the grid and the selection of parameters depend on the grid
type and on the measurement device.

You can select events, parameters, and statistics you would like to see in the grid table. Move your
mouse pointer on top of a parameter/event, and the tooltip will display more information about that
particular parameter/event.

In the Selected tab you can view which parameters/events you have selected and change their
order using the arrow buttons.

Page 278
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.30.2.20 User parameters


The User Parameters function allows you to specify parameters from layer messages that will be
automatically decoded and the values displayed in the Device Status window. In the Grid Properties
dialog, click the User Parameters button and then Add in the Layer Parameters dialog.

Parameter name and Short name refer to the long and short name of the parameter to be
decoded.

Search string is the string that is searched from the decoded layer messages, for example,
Ordered MS power level.

Layer defines the layer messages from where the string is searched.

Page 279
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

After you have defined all the parameters, click OK. The new parameter is added to the list in the
Layer Parameters dialog. Click OK to exit the dialog. In the Parameters dialog, expand the User
Parameters item. Select the parameter you just defined and click OK.

The list of user parameters that you have defined are saved in a file called Parameters.xml.

User Parameters can be searched in messages grids. The user can also perform more complex
searches where the search key is split across multiple rows of data. It is possible, for example, to
search and display multiple results in a single Layer 3 message.

It is possible to export and import user parameters from and to Nemo Outdoor. See chapter
Export/import settings for more information.

6.31 Viewing maps


Nemo Outdoor supports several types of outdoor maps: Google, MapX, and OpenStreetMap maps.
Most of the functions are the same for all types but there are some differences.

Please note that in order to use OpenStreetMap maps, the computer needs to be
connected to the Internet or OpenStreetMap data must be downloaded on the computer.

Please note that if Google map license is activated, MapX and OpenStreetMap maps
cannot be used simultaneously. Also map data caching is not allowed with Google maps
so you must zoom and position the map to the correct location before starting the
measurement.

Page 280
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Open a map by selecting Data Windows | Map | [map type]. If you open a new MapX map,
Nemo Outdoor will open by default the map that you have entered in the Default Map field in the
User Interface Properties dialog, Paths tab. If you open an OpenStreetMap map, the view will
center on your current location.

Note that the Indoor map differs from the example below. For information on Indoor
measurements, refer to chapter Viewing indoor maps.

It is possible to view selected parameters on a map by drag and dropping them in it. Click on a
parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the map. Parameters can also be opened
for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press down the Ctrl button and select the
devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. After this, right-click on the parameter you wish
to view from the parameter tree and select Open in Map from the drop-down menu.

If you have a GPS receiver connected to the test system, the current location of the test vehicle will
be displayed on the map as a circle on the route. If there is no GPS connected to the system, you
can define the current location manually with the Set Current Location tool (the button is
activated when recording is started). A new GPS event is created in the handler after which all
location-specific data, such as BTS cell names are displayed using the specified location.

You can observe the values of certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map. You
can define which color refers to which parameter value. This way it is easy to spot the problem
areas on a map.

While viewing notifications on a map, hovering above the notification icons will display a tooltip with
information such as cell name (if cell site file is used) and channel number.

Page 281
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.31.1 Base stations on a map


If you select a BTS file (.nbf or .csv) for the measurement file, the base stations will be displayed. A
line will be drawn from the test vehicle to the serving base station. Also, the distance to the serving
base station is displayed in the status bar of the map window.

Note that the BTS file is displayed only if a device is associated with the BTS file (BTS
Properties Connected devices).

The BTS icons display the antennas, the channel numbers for the antennas, and directions that the
antennas point to. The antennas are drawn in one degree steps. Hover your mouse over the base
station icon to see more information about the BTS.

Note that if there are more than five cells in a BTS, the BTS name will be truncated with
In this case, click on the BTS icon to view the rest of the cells.

Page 282
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.31.1.1 Importing BTS data


Nemo Outdoor supports user-configurable BTS data import. You can import BTS data, for example
in .csv, .html or .nbf format, and specify the column mapping in Nemo Outdoor so that the data can
be opened in Nemo Outdoor. The column mapping settings are saved as a BTS template and this
template can be used later on to quickly import BTS data from files of similar format.

To create a new BTS template, go to the Measurement Properties General page, select the
source data in the BTS file field, and click Create Template File.

The column on the left (Template) shows the column headings in the customers own data and the
second column (Nemo) defines what column it corresponds with in the Nemo BTS file format. You
should define at least the mandatory columns: SYSTEM, SITE, CELL, LAT, and LON. All unmapped
columns will be loaded as user-defined columns. Finally save and click OK.

Page 283
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

The BTS template file is now saved and it can be used for other files. The saved BTS templates are
available in the BTS Template File Selection dialog which can be accessed from the Measurement
Properties General page and from the BTS Properties dialog of map and indoor data views.

6.31.1.2 Editing BTS files in Nemo Outdoor


It is possible to edit the locations of base station icons directly in Nemo Outdoor. Open a BTS file on
a map. Right-click on a BTS icon and select Move. Then click on the new location and the BTS icon
is moved there. You can also remove BTS sites from the BTS file. The changes are saved in the BTS
file when you exit Nemo Outdoor.

Page 284
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Right-click on a BTS icon and select Edit or right-click on the map and select Base Stations | Add
Site. In the BTS Editor you can edit the site and cell information. You can also add new sites, cells,
and neighbor cells by clicking the Add button.

For sites, you must define the following information: site name, longitude, and latitude.

Under sites you have cells. For cells there are some mandatory and optional settings.

The settings below are mandatory. The available settings depend on the system.

System defines in which cellular system the cell belongs.

Cell name defines a unique name for the cell.

Antenna direction defines the direction of the antenna in degrees.

Channel number defines the channel number.

Page 285
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Cell ID/Cell ID 16-bit defines a unique cell ID for the cell.

Radio network controller ID defines a unique radio network controller ID for the cell.

Scrambling code defines a unique scrambling code for the cell.

The settings below are optional.

Antenna height defines the height of the antenna from the ground in meters.

Antenna tilt defines the angle of the main beam of the antenna relative to the horizontal plane.

Antenna beam width defines the width of the beam in degrees.

Cell range defines the range of the cell in kilometers.

For Cell type the options are undefined, normal, repeater, DAS (for WLAN), and small cell (for
WLAN).

Location area code defines in which location area the cell belongs.

Routing area code defines in which routing area the cell belongs.

UTRAN registration area defines in which UTRAN registration area the cell belongs.

Frequency (for WLAN) defines the cell frequency in MHz.

Service set identifier (for WLAN) defines the SSID, a unique identifier for the cell.

IEEE 802.11 protocol (for WLAN) defines the IEEE 802.11 protocol of the cell.

6.31.2 MapX maps


You can customize the MapX map view using the MapX properties. The customized settings can be
saved in a MapInfo Geoset file (.gst) and loaded later on. MapInfo Workspaces (*.wor file) cannot
be directly opened with MapX, but can be saved as a .gst file in MapInfo Professional using the
MapInfo MapX Geoset Utility tool (Geoset.mbx) that ships with version 5.x of MapInfo Professional.
This file (.gst) can be directly opened by MapX in Nemo Outdoor.

Each MapInfo raster map has two files: an image file (.tif. .gif, .jpg) and a .tab file When MapInfo
raster maps are used, the image file is the actual map image file. The .tab file contains information
about a map (such as location coordinates) and is used by Nemo Outdoor to refer to a particular
map. When using vector data for MapInfo, there are three different files that need to be in the
same directory, the .tab, .map, and the .id file. The corresponding image and .tab files for raster
maps have to be in the same folder in order to view a MapInfo map. If you are using a large map
(size over 1 Mb), updating the map window will slow down Nemo Outdoor functions. We
recommend you minimize the map size by reducing the number of colors to 256 or 16, or turning
the color map to black and white.

Page 286
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.31.2.1 MapInfo Tab-file export


To export a route plan, create a route plan, right-click on the map and select Route Plan | Save
as MapInfo Tab-File.

The MapInfo Tab-File Export dialog displays a list of parameters or items that can be exported.
Select the items that you would like to include in the .tab file. Also define a File name and Layer
title for the exported .tab file.

To change the symbol for each parameter, double-click the parameter or select a parameter and
click the Change Symbol button. The symbol is used to draw the route in MapInfo. In the Symbol
Style dialog, you can select the symbol and define some effects and background color for it. Finally
click OK.

Click OK in the MapInfo Tab-File Export to save the .tab file.

Page 287
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.31.3 Route plans


Route plans are useful when you want to follow a certain route while performing a measurement.
You can create route plans automatically from a measurement in playback mode, or you can
manually create one with the Add waypoint functionality both during a measurement and during
playback. In addition, you can alter the route plans at any point through the control buttons in the
Waypoints view in the map side panel. You can save a route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf), and if
you have made any changes to the route plan properties in the map window, you can save them as
a custom window for later use. The custom window will also contain changes made to the color set
or Waypoints views.

If you have previously created and saved a route plan (.rpf), you can open it through the Open
Route Plan item in the map toolbar or by right-clicking on the map and selecting Route Plan |
Open from the popup menu. The route plan (.rpf) is now viewed on the map and in the map side
panel, and is ready to be used in a measurement. By pressing Ctrl+A you can jump from one
waypoint to the next.

6.31.3.1 Creating and modifying route plans with waypoints


You can create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint button in the map
toolbar, or by selecting Add Waypoint in the map popup menu, and clicking on the map. The Add
button at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel is also activated. A new route plan
(.rpf) appears in the Layers view, and the Waypoints view is enabled. You can save the route plan
for later use by clicking on the Save Route Plan icon in the map toolbar or by selecting it in the
map popup menu.

Page 288
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

You can define waypoint-related settings in the Waypoint view in the side bar. The Show next
waypoint option should be selected when you want to view the next waypoint on the map during a
measurement. Note that the Show next waypoint functionality is only enabled in online or idle
mode, not during playback. The next waypoint is shown on the route as a big circle. If you clear the
Show next waypoint option, the Waypoint detection radius and Distance to next waypoint
items will also be disabled.

The Waypoint detection radius slider indicates at which distance (meters) the next waypoint is
selected. As you approach the next waypoint during a measurement, the next waypoint is selected
on the map when distance to it is smaller than the distance selected in the slide bar. The Distance
to next waypoint field indicates how many meters there still are to the next waypoint from the
current position on the route, so the figure decreases as you approach the next waypoint. The
Distance from previous waypoint field indicates how many meters it is from the previous
waypoint from the current position on the route. With the Next button you can move from one
waypoint to the next.

You can make changes to the route plan using the buttons at the bottom of the Waypoints view.

To select a waypoint on the map, click on the Select button in the Waypoints view, then select a
waypoint on the map. This waypoint is shown as a bigger circle than the others. In addition, the
delete functionality is only enabled when the Select button is selected. If you click on Delete, the
selected waypoint on the route plan will be deleted, and the previous waypoint on the route will
automatically be selected and shown as a bigger circle. If the deleted waypoint was the first
waypoint on the route plan, the next waypoint on the route will be selected. Moreover, the Delete
button is only enabled with the Select button if there is more than one waypoint on the map.
Reclick on Select to clear the functionality.

You can move waypoints on the map by first clicking on Select, then selecting a specific waypoint
on the map. Click on the Move button, and you will be able to move the selected waypoint on the
map. The part of the route attached to the waypoint is moved with the waypoint. With the Reverse
button you can reverse the direction of the route plan.

Page 289
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

The Add button in the Waypoints view in the side panel is synchronized with the Add waypoint
button in the map toolbar. If you click on either button when they are inactive, they will both be
activated, and conversely if you click on either button when active, they will become inactive. When
you select either, you are able to place new waypoints in the route plan.

6.31.3.2 Creating and saving route plans from a measurement


In addition to creating a route plan with waypoints, you can create a route plan from a
measurement.

Start Nemo Outdoor, load a measurement file and open a map window. Right-click on the map and
select View Entire Route, or zoom in on the map to make sure the measurement contains GPS
coordinates. Create a route plan by clicking the Create Route Plan toolbar icon, or select
Route Plan | Create from the map popup menu. The route plan should now be visible on the map,
the layer list should have a new layer (Untitled.rpf), and the control buttons on the Waypoints
view should be enabled. The route plan should closely follow the route from which it was created.
Save the route plan by clicking the Save Route Plan item in the toolbar, or by selecting it in the
map popup menu.

You can also modify the route plan with the Select, Move, Add and Delete buttons at the bottom
of the Waypoints view in the side panel. Note that when you click on Select, you may need to zoom
in on the map to view the discrete waypoints. The selected waypoint will show as a bigger circle
among all the circles. See chapter Creating and modifying route plans with waypoints for more
information on how to use the control buttons, and on how to read the waypoints on the route plan
during a measurement.

6.31.3.3 Saving a route plan to a custom window


When you create a route plan and save it, the actual route plan will be saved as a Route Plan File
(.rpf). However, if you have made changes to the default map window and to the layer-specific
properties, and you want to save these changes, you need to save the map window as a custom
window. When you open a measurement the next time, you can open the custom window by right-
clicking on the gray space outside the map window, and select Map | [name of custom window].

First, create or open a route plan, and save it. Next, double-click on the route plan in the map side
panel to access the Route Plan Properties dialog, change the properties and click OK. Change the
settings in the Waypoints view in the side panel, right-click on the map, and select Save As
Custom Window in the map popup menu. Close the map and open the custom window you saved.
When you open the properties dialog, the properties should be what you set them to.

Page 290
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.31.4 Map popup menu


Right-click on the map to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the
map. Please note that the contents of the menu depend on the map type.

6.31.4.1 Custom Window - Properties

Page 291
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select
groups for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are
available for each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be
available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE
measurement.

6.31.4.2 Custom window - Save as new custom window


Right-click on a graph window and select Custom Window - Save as New Custom Window from
the popup menu. The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a name for
the custom window and define the custom window groups.

6.31.4.3 Custom window - Save changes


Use the Custom Window - Save Changes command to save changes made in the custom
window.

6.31.4.4 Save as - CSV file


Use the Save as CSV File command to export the active view into CSV format.

6.31.4.5 Save as - Image


Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a .jpg image.

6.31.4.6 Save as - MapInfo Tab-file


Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-file command to export the active view into MapInfo format.

6.31.4.7 Save as MapInfo Geoset


Use the Save as MapInfo Geoset command to export the active view into MapInfo Geoset format.

6.31.4.8 Export to Google Earth


By clicking on the Export to Google Earth item you can export a map with measurement route,
colors based on selected parameter, notifications, and base station information to Google Earth .kml
file which can be viewed with the installed Google Earth application.

6.31.4.9 Move view to


With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. See
chapter The ribbon contains all Nemo Outdoor commands. The commands are arranged in tabs.

Under the Nemo Outdoor button, you will find more commands.

Page 292
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

View groups for more information on view groups.

6.31.4.10 Open map


By selecting the Open Map item, you can open existing map files (.tab).

6.31.4.11 Find map at position


When you right click on the map and select the Find Map at Position item, Nemo Outdoor will
view a list of possibly more detailed maps of the same location from the directory you have
specified in the View | User Interface Properties | Paths dialog. In this way you have the
possibility to choose the most appropriate map for your purposes. Click the Add Layer button to
add a suggested layer on the map.

Page 293
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.31.4.12 Base stations - Add site


With the Add Site tool you can edit and add new BTS sites on the map. Please see chapter Editing
BTS files in Nemo Outdoor for more information.

6.31.4.13 Base stations - Find cell


With Find Cell functionality you can search for a cell in a map window based on a parameter. Below
a cell is searched based on its Cell ID number. You can also search for custom data entered in the
BTS file header and for neighbor cells.

6.31.4.14 Change view - Previous view, View entire map, and View entire route
With the Previous View command, you can return to the previous map view, and the View Entire
Map command displays the whole map. By selecting the View Entire Route item you will be able
to view the whole route on the map.

Page 294
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.31.4.15 Color legends


The Color legends view shows the selected color set for a measurement route. If you have loaded
a multi measurement and added multiple routes with assigned color sets on the map, the color
legends will be shown in separate tabs. See chapter Color Set Editor on how to create and edit color
sets.

6.31.4.16 Route - Add a waypoint to route plan


Activates the Add Waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually.

6.31.4.17 Route Create route plan


The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in a map window.

6.31.4.18 Route Open route plan


Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on a map.

6.31.4.19 Route Save route plan


The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf) for later use.

6.31.4.20 Route Save route plan as MapInfo Tab-file


The Save Route Plan as MapInfo Tab-File item will let you save the route plan as a .tab file that
can be opened in MapInfo.

6.31.4.21 Route Clear route


Clear Route tool removes the measurement route from the map. Note that this command is
activated only during measurements. It cannot be used during playback.

6.31.4.22 Route Modify route


With the Modify Route tool you can modify and reposition the measurement route in playback.
This is especially useful if there is a gap in the measurement route, for example, because GPS fix
was lost in a tunnel. Select the tool. The route will be displayed as dots.

Page 295
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Drag and drop the dots into their new positions. Please note that you should maintain the correct
order of the dots. Otherwise the route will appear jagged.

When you have finished modifying the route, right-click on the map and clear the Modify Route tool.
The modified route is now displayed in normal mode.

6.31.4.23 Route Set current location


Set Current Location tool defines the current location when no GPS data is available. Note that
this command is activated only during measurements and when no GPS is connected. It cannot be
used during playback.

6.31.4.24 Route Show route history

If the Route History side panel is not visible, right-click on the map and select Route | Show
Route History. With the Route History tool you can search for measurements recorded within a
specified time frame and plot those measurement routes on a map. This requires that a GPX file has
been created for the measurement. Define the folder from where GPX files will be searched and
define the time frame. After you click the Search button, Nemo Outdoor will search for the GPX
files and display the matching routes on the map.

The search results will also be displayed as layers. Double-click the route history layer to open the
Route History Route Properties dialog where you can edit the route color and thickness.

6.31.4.25 Route Show waypoints


The Show Waypoints item will activate the free route planning functionality on the map. You can
create and save a route plan for later use. The Show next waypoint field is only activated when
at least one device and one GPS receiver are attached to Nemo Outdoor in online or offline mode.
This functionality is not active during measurement playback. See chapter Creating and modifying
route plans with waypoints for more information.

Page 296
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.31.4.26 Open StreetMap - Download tiles


With the Download Tiles tool you can download OpenStreetMap data on your computer so you can
use the OpenStreetMap maps even when you are not connected to the Internet.

It is recommended to use this method always with OpenStreetMap maps as downloading


map data in the middle of measurements may affect the results.

Zoom levels defines the number of levels from which map data is downloaded. The more levels
you choose, the more data is downloaded.

Select the Reload existing tiles option to overwrite existing map data.

Click the Select Area button to the select an area with your mouse from where map data will be
downloaded.

6.31.4.27 Open StreetMap - Empty disk cache


Select the Empty Disk Cache option to delete all downloaded OpenStreetMap data. The tiles open
on the map will not be deleted.

6.31.4.28 Layer properties


The dialog appearing when you click on the Layer Properties item depends on the layer selected in
the map side panel. It is possible to view three different kinds of layers in the side panel: the
device-specific measurement route layer, the base station layer, and the route plan layer.

Page 297
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.31.4.29 Route properties

In the Route Properties dialog, you can define map-related settings. With the Reset to default
properties and Use previous properties buttons you can quickly change settings for a route
layer.

Device defines the device that is being viewed on the map.

Select the Show Device Label next to route option to display the device name at the starting
point of the measurement route.

Line thickness defines the thickness of the route in pixels.

The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route on the map in x and y directions. To
define a default offset between multi-measurement routes, go to the Indoor Properties dialog.

Page 298
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

With the Show parameter next to route option you can display a selected parameter value in
numerical format next to the route. Select the parameter and define the text and background
colors.

Select the Show active cell information option to display active cell information and direction.

The Draw as dots item enables you to view the measurement route in dots instead of a line. If the
Draw as dots item is selected, the Dot size field appears and allows you to define the dot size in
pixels.

When the Draw during pause option is deselected, the route is not drawn when measurement is
paused.

Use default color defines a single color for the measurement route. The entire route is drawn with
the same color.

If you would like to colorize the route based on parameter values, select Yes for Use color set.
First, select the Parameter for which you would like to define colors. Then select a matching color
set in the Color set field or select New to create a new color set. Click the Edit Color Set button
to access the Color Set Editor dialog. See chapter Color Set Editor for more information on
defining color sets.

Please note that even if you are using a color set to colorize the measurement route, the
route will be drawn with the default color if the selected parameter does not have valid
values. Therefore it is best not to use the default color in the color set.

If you are measuring with a scanner, click on Configure Filters to select specific channels,
frequencies, or scrambling codes for which the parameter values are displayed.

To filter spectrum scanning results, define the frequency exactly in the same format as it appears in
the Spectrum graph.

To select scrambling codes, first select a channel by clicking the Select button under Selected
channel numbers. Then select scrambling codes for the selected channel by clicking the Select
button under Selected scrambling codes.

Page 299
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

If you would like to use averaging in drawing the route, select the Trend line option and select
from the Number of previous values field how many values will be included in the average value.

When the Hide route line on invalid value is selected, the default color is not drawn. For
example, if the route is colored based on Ec/No but the terminal is using GSM, the system route is
not drawn while in GSM.

Selecting the Show notifications option will view notifications on the indoor map. You can define
the size of the notifications in pixels in the Size field.

Connected BTS File refers to the BTS file that is used in connection with the map. Select a BTS file
by clicking the Add BTS File button in the map side panel.

Select the Draw line to active base station option to draw a line from the serving BTS to the test
vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color.

Select the Draw line(s) to neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the neighboring cells to
the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color.

Select the Draw only to active system cell(s) option if you only want to draw a line from active
system cell(s) to the test vehicle.

Select the Draw only to n strongest neighbor cells option to draw a line to a defined maximum
number of strongest neighbors (per system) based on the following parameters:

GSM: RX Level Sub (if available) or RX Level Full

UMTS: Ec/N0

CDMA/EVDO: Ec/Io

LTE: RSRP

Select the Draw line(s) to detected neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the detected
neighboring cells to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color.

Select the Draw line(s) to missing neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the missing
neighboring cells to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Please note that
lines to missing neighbor cell(s) are drawn only when measuring with a mobile and a scanner. If
missing neighbor detection is performed using a scanner only, this information is not shown on the
map. Instead, the missing neighbor information can be viewed in a table grid.

Select the Draw line(s) to interferer cell(s) option to draw a line from interferer cells to the test
vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Please note that a BTS file must be used with
this feature. GSM interfering analysis results (IANALYSIS event) are written to the terminal output
file and due to this reason, the interfering cells can be seen on a map only when a BTS file is used
with the terminal.

By selecting the Show Textual notes option, you will be able to view textual notes on a
measurement route in the map window. You can select a text and background color for the note in
the Text color and Background color fields.

Page 300
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.31.4.30 BTS Properties dialog


Double-click a BTS file layer in the Layers side panel to open the BTS Properties dialog. With the
Reset to default properties and Use previous properties buttons you can quickly change
settings for a BTS file layer.

BTS file refers to the BTS file that is used on the map.

BTS template file defines how customer-specific BTS data is imported into Nemo Outdoor. Please
refer to chapter Importing BTS data for more information.

If you have a BTS file that contains base stations from several systems (e.g., UMTS and GSM),
select the Draw only active system base stations option to display only base stations from the
active system, in other words, the system in which the test device is currently. The other base
stations are hidden.

Define also the size and color of the BTS icons. Note that you define a different color for active
system base stations and for other base stations.

Select the Use color set to color BTS icons when you want to distinguish between different base
stations through the use of existing and user-defined color sets.

Select a parameter from the Parameter drop-down menu based on which you want to color base
stations, and a color set in the Color set drop-down menu.

Clicking on the Edit Color Set button will lead to the Color Set Editor dialog where you can edit
existing color sets or create a new one to suit your needs. See chapter Color Set Editor for more
information on how to edit and create color sets.

Page 301
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

With the Show parameter next to cell option you can hide and show a number of parameters,
such as antenna tilt and direction, routing area code and site name, on the map.

Select the Show labels option to display a label or a description next to the selected cell
information and define the Text color and Background color.

Select the Draw cell range option to view the cell range on the map. Define the degree of cell
range transparency in the Cell range transparency.

The Connected devices displays a list of devices that you can connect to the base station sites.
Note that the BTS sites will not be drawn if no device is selected.

6.31.4.31 Route Plan Properties dialog


When a route plan is selected in the side panel and you right-click on the map and select Layer
Properties, the Route Plan Properties dialog appears. You can also view the dialog by double-
clicking on the route plan in the map side panel.

Route plan file field defines the name of the route plan you selected in the map side panel.

The Waypoint properties field allows you to define the color for the waypoint icon and the line
attaching the icons together. You can also define the icon size and line thickness in pixels.

The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route plan on the map in x and y directions.

6.31.4.32 Map Properties dialog

Page 302
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

In the Map Properties dialog you can define the offset (in pixels) between routes on a map. This
value is used with multi measurements where you have multiple routes which, without offset, would
overlap each other. You can also disable the default offset completely. To define offset values for
individual routes, go to the dialog and define the X and Y offset values.

6.31.4.33 MapX Properties dialog


Click the MapX Properties button to define some MapX specific properties. Note that these
settings differ according to the map provider. These settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file
by clicking the Save Map button in the Map window. To later open the .gst file, click the Open Map
button, select MapInfo Geoset file in the Files of Type listbox, and select a file from the list.

If you are using MapInfo maps, you can define the appearance of the map even further by
clicking the MapX Properties button in the Route Properties dialog. In the Layers tab the table
shows a list of the current layers. The order on the list defines the order in which the layers are
displayed on a map; for example, in this case the Route layer is on the top, Current Position layer is
under that, and World map is at the bottom. This utility is useful if you want to have a bigger map
on the bottom (e.g., a map of Europe) and a more detailed map of a smaller area (e.g., of Helsinki)
on top of that. To add layers on the map click Add. An Open dialog is opened where you can choose
the map you want to add as a layer. The map is added on the list and with the Up and Down you
can change the maps position on the list. By selecting and clearing the Visible option you can
decide whether or not to display the layer on the map. To remove layers from the map, select the
layer from the list and click the Remove button.

6.31.4.34 Textual comments


With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map. Select Add Textual
Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map. The box can be
repositioned by dragging it on the map. To remove or edit individual comments, right-click on the
text box and select Remove or Edit. To remove all comments, right-click on the map and select
Textual Comments | Remove All Textual Comments.

Page 303
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.31.4.35 Tool

Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup.

Arrow tool changes the cursor back to an arrow.

Pan tool changes the cursor into a hand that can scroll the map.

Center tool allows the map to be centered according to the cursor point.

Zoom In and Zoom Out tools change the cursor into a magnifying glass. You can also zoom in and
out using the mouse wheel and the + and - keyboard buttons.

Use the Measure Distance tool to measure the distance between multiple points on a map. Click
the Measure Distance button to activate the tool and click the Add point button. Select the
points on the map and the distance between these points is displayed on the map. The Total
distance is displayed in the left-hand panel.

Page 304
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

With the Draw distance circle tool you can draw a circle where the distance between the last two
points is used as the radius.

To remove points from the map, click the Remove latest point or Remove all points buttons. To
hide the Measure Distance panel, click the Measure Distance button.

Show Scale Bar displays the scale bar in the window.

6.31.4.36 Auto center


The Auto Center tool pans the map so that the current location will stay on the visible area of the
map. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto Center command is
selected.

6.31.4.37 Auto clear route


The Auto Clear Route tool automatically removes the route from the map when measurement is
stopped. If you wish to keep the route on the map when starting a new measurement, unselect the
tool.

Page 305
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

6.31.4.38 Show layers list

The Layers side panel displays a list of items available on the map. They can be BTS files,
measurement routes, map layers, route history search results, etc. Double-click an item to access
its Properties dialog. You can hide and display layers by selecting and deselecting the option next
to the layer or click the X button to delete the layer. With the buttons you can add new layers on
the map.

6.31.4.39 Full screen


Selecting the Full screen item will display Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode.

6.31.5 Color Set Editor


You can access the Color Set Editor by clicking the Edit Color Set button in the Route
Properties | Color dialog. With the Color Set Editor you can create color sets to be used in maps
and grids. In the Color Set Editor dialog you will see a list of all existing color sets. You can sort
the color sets by selecting the Type. You can also search for a color set by its name. To edit an
existing color set, double-click on the color set.

Page 306
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

In the Color Set Properties dialog you can edit the settings for each color set.

Name and Short name identify the color set.

You can also type a description of the color set in the Description field.

Type defines what kind of data the color set is used with, for example, numerical, gradient or
string. The type setting can be used to sort the color sets in the Color Set Editor dialog.

With the Automatically generate missing values option you can specify colors for some fixed
values while the rest are automatically generated. This option can be used with numerical or string
type of color sets. This is especially useful with parameters with many values (e.g. PNs and scr.
code).

Values table displays the different value ranges and the colors associated with them.

Page 307
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Click the Add button to define the colors and limits. In the Range Properties dialog, select the
color and then the upper and lower limits of the value range. You can also write a description for
the value range. Finally click OK.

Click the Add Range button to quickly assign colors to parameter values. In the Add Range
dialog, define the top and bottom values and the step, i.e., how many values are represented by
the same color. Finally click OK and Nemo Outdoor will automatically assign colors for the
parameter values.

6.32 Export/import settings


It is possible to export and import various settings, Nemo Server configuration files, and
measurement lists from and to Nemo Outdoor. This function can also be used to send configurations
remotely to Nemo Outdoor from an (S)FTP server.

6.32.1 Export settings to file


To export settings to a file, go to File | Export Settings | To File in Nemo Outdoor. Define a
name for the .aex file on your PC. The exported settings will be saved in this file.

Next, the Export Settings dialog appears. Select the items you wish to export, and click OK.

Page 308
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

The selected items are now saved in the .aex file.

6.32.2 Export settings to FTP server


To export settings to an FTP server, go to File | Export Settings | To FTP Server in Nemo
Outdoor. Define a name for the .aex file on your PC. The exported settings will be saved in this file.

Click the FTP Options button to define settings for the FTP server. See page 317 for more
information on the settings.

Next, the Export Settings dialog appears. Select the items you wish to export, and click OK.

The selected items are now saved in the .aex file and exported to the FTP server. The exported
settings can now be downloaded from the FTP server to any Nemo Outdoor unit with access to the
server.

6.32.3 Import settings from file


To import settings, select File | Import Settings From File in Nemo Outdoor. Select the file and
click Open.

Select the settings you wish to import in the Import Settings dialog.

Page 309
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Click OK. The selected settings and files are now saved in Nemo Outdoor and they can be taken
into use.

6.32.4 Import settings from FTP server


To import settings from an FTP server, select File | Import Settings | From FTP Server in Nemo
Outdoor. If you have not defined any FTP server settings, the list will be empty. When FTP server
settings are defined, a list of exported setting files will appear.

Select the user parameters you wish to import in the Import Settings dialog.

Click OK. The selected settings and files are now saved in Nemo Outdoor and they can be taken
into use.

Page 310
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

7 ENDING MEASUREMENTS

The measurement is being recorded when a REC text appears in the upper right corner of the main
window. Follow these instructions to stop the measurement.

To end measurements:
1. If you are using a script to perform the measurement, you can either wait until the script
file has been executed or interrupt the script by clicking the Stop Script button in the
ribbon.

2. If you are performing measurements manually, the measurement process is terminated


either by clicking the Stop button in the ribbon. All the ongoing calls will be stopped and
scanning will be terminated. Data transfers will be stopped, PDP context will be deactivated,
and GPRS detach will be performed.

3. Nemo Outdoor will display a report window with some call statistics. At this point, you can
choose if you would like to save this file or delete it. You can also start a playback of this
file.

When carrying out measurements using a script, stopping the measurement is not
recommended while a test call is on. Always wait until the end of the call, then select
Measurement | Stop Script or click the Stop button to end the measurement. If the
measurement is stopped while the test call is on, it may affect the Quality Survey Report
values. The Call Length from the TCH assignment percentage in this report might indicate
calls to be shorter than they actually were.

Page 311
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

7.1 Measurement report

The Measurement Report dialog is displayed when recording is stopped. The dialog displays some
statistics from the measurement.

Select the Save statistics to file option to save the statistics to a separate Excel .csv file. The
filename is the same as for the actual measurement file and the file is located in the Results folder.

Select the Send measurement results to server option to send the log files to a server. See
chapter Uploading measurement files to server for more information.

If you do not want this dialog to appear, select the Do not show this dialog again option.

Select the Compress measurement file(s) option to automatically compress the files below into a
single measurement archive (ZIP file). After the files are compressed, the original files are deleted.

measurement files (.nmf)

binary files (.nbl)

packet capture files (.pcap)

marker files (.mrk)

indoor map files (.tab and image)

Page 312
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

To save the measurement file under another name, click the Rename button and type a new file
name in the field that appears. To delete the file without saving, click the Delete button. To export
the measurement, click the Export button (see Exporting measurements).

Click the Playback button to playback the measurement file immediately. To save the file, click
Save.

Note that if you press Esc on your computers keyboard, or click on the button on the
dialog, you will save the measurement file just as if you had clicked on the Save button.

Click the Export button the access the Export Measurements dialog (see Exporting
measurements).

Click the Analyze button to open the measurement file for analysis in Nemo Analyze.

Note that this requires that you have Nemo Analyze installed on the same computer
where Nemo Outdoor is installed.

In the Export to Nemo Analyze dialog, select a workbook where the data is opened and/or a report
template that is used for creating a report from the data. If you do not select a workbook or a
report, the measurement file is added to the Nemo Analyze database without starting Nemo
Analyze. Finally click Export.

Page 313
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

8 MEASUREMENT RESULTS

This section guides you on viewing and analyzing the measurement results produced by Nemo
Outdoor, and explains how measurement files are uploaded to an FTP server.

The measurement process produces one or more output files at a time, depending on whether you
have been using a mobile and a scanner at the same time or just one device at a time. The file
name can be user defined but Nemo Outdoor always decides the extension part. If you change the
file name manually, the file name format should be xxxx.1.nmf where the number refers to the
device number.

8.1 Analyzing measurement results


The measurement results produced by Nemo Outdoor can be viewed and analyzed, for example,
with:

Nemo Outdoor Playback functions

Nemo Analyze

Nemo WindCatcher

Text editor

Spreadsheet software such as Microsoft Excel

Mapping software via conversion utilities provided by Anite.

8.2 Playing back measurement files


Playback is a handy tool for making a quick analysis of measurements. You can playback files
anytime and anywhere immediately after the measurement has been finished or later on.

When you open a file for playback, Nemo Outdoor will deactivate all connected devices. Nemo
Outdoor will ask if you would like to save the current device. If you answer Yes, Nemo Outdoor will
save the current configuration and reactivate the devices that you had connected before the
playback when you close the playback file(s).

To open files for playback, select File Open Measurement and select the measurement files.

The Home tab in the ribbon will be updated with the Playback tools.

The status bar at the bottom of the main window displays the progress of the playback. There is
also a time slider which you can use to jump into certain points in the measurement.

Page 314
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

8.2.1 Viewing and moving markers


You can use the grid window to view the markers you have inserted in a measurement file during
measurements. After a file has been loaded, select the Play command from the Playback menu or
click the Play button on the tool bar.

Open a marker grid from Data Windows | New Grid | User Markers.

The grid window will display all the markers that you have inserted in the file during measurements.
Click on any of the markers in the grid window, and all the other open windows will display the
same point of time.

Markers are also displayed on the Indoor map along with the marker number. You can move the
markers by selecting a marker from the list (click the index number) and pressing the Move button.
Place the red pin to the new location on the map. The new longitude and latitude information is
saved in the marker file.

Page 315
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

8.2.2 Closing playback files


After playback, you need to close the playback file. Select File | Close Measurement. If you saved
the current device configuration when you started the playback, Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would
like to load the same device(s).

Page 316
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

8.3 Uploading measurement files to server


You can upload measurement files from Nemo Outdoor for storage or post-processing when a
measurement is stopped, or at any later point via the Nemo Outdoor user interface. Note that it is
recommended to stop all measurements before uploading files.

Select File | Send Measurement to Server. First select the server type from the bottom left
corner of the dialog and then select the measurement files. Click Next.

The contents of the Send Options dialog depend on the selected server type: FTP, HTTPS, Nemo
Xynergy, Dropbox, or Nemo Cloud.

Page 317
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

8.3.1 FTP send options

Define the server address, username, and password and the name of the Remote folder, i.e.
folder in which the measurement files are sent on the server.

Select the Use secure protocol option to send the measurement files using HTTPS protocol.

Select the Use passive mode option to send the measurement files using passive mode.

When the Move local files to Sent folder after upload option is selected, the measurement
files are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo Tools directory on your computer after the
transfer. You can also change this default destination in User Interface Properties | Paths |
Measurements.

The file transfer can be performed using a default Internet connection, via a user-selected data
connection, or via mobile broadband.

When you select the Use a Proxy Server option, the Proxy address, Username and Password
fields will become active.

After configuring the settings, click Finish. The measurement file(s) are sent to the server.

Page 318
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

8.3.2 HTTPS send options

Define the server address, autouser (username), and password and the name of the Remote
folder, i.e. folder in which the measurement files are sent on the server.

When the Move local files to Sent folder after upload option is selected, the measurement
files are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo Tools directory on your computer after the
transfer. You can also change this default destination in User Interface Properties | Paths |
Measurements.

The file transfer can be performed using a default Internet connection, via a user-selected data
connection, or using mobile broadband.

When you select the Use a Proxy Server option, the Proxy address, Username and Password
fields will become active.

After configuring the settings, click Finish. The measurement file(s) are sent to the server. The URL
from which the file can be loaded is displayed for each uploaded file. URLs can be easily copied and
distributed e.g. by email.

Page 319
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

8.3.3 Nemo Xynergy send options

Define the username, password, and URI and click the Refresh button. Nemo Outdoor will
connect with the Nemo Xynergy server. After the connection has been established, you will be able
to define the project type (acceptance, benchmarking, inbuilding, or optimization,), and other
parameters, such as market, venue, building, and cluster, depending on the selected project type.
You can also add new clusters and projects.

When the Move local files to Sent folder after upload option is selected, the measurement
files are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo Tools directory on your computer after the
transfer. You can also change this default destination in User Interface Properties | Paths |
Measurements.

Page 320
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

With Advanced Options you can define more detailed processing options for the data. The
contents of this dialog depend on the selected project type.

File Options - File Group option. When the option is enabled, you can define a file group for each
uploaded measurement file (device) and the file groups are implemented as subfolders under the
Nemo Xynergy project file during the data upload. Define a subfolder for each measurement file
(device).

Note that file grouping cannot be used simultaneously with the MO-MT processing option.

When uploading inbuilding measurements, click Yes in the Do you want to mark building as
ready for reporting? message box when you have uploaded all files from a building and wish to
start running reports for the building.

After configuring the settings, click Finish. The measurement file(s) are sent to the server.

Page 321
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

8.3.4 Dropbox send options

User access token is required for Dropbox testing. Click the Get Access Token button. You will
be redirected to the Dropbox login page. Enter your account information and click Sign In. You will
return to Nemo Outdoor and an access token will appear in the field.

Page 322
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Remote folder defines the name and location of the destination folder that is on the Dropbox
server.

When the Move local files to Sent folder after upload option is selected, the measurement
files are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo Tools directory on your computer after the
transfer. You can also change this default destination in User Interface Properties | Paths |
Measurements.

The file transfer can be performed using a default Internet connection, via a user-selected data
connection, or using mobile broadband.

When you select the Use a Proxy Server option, the Proxy address, Username and Password
fields will become active.

After configuring the settings, click Finish. The measurement file(s) are sent to the server.

8.3.5 Nemo Cloud send options


Before sending files to Nemo Cloud, you will need to define Nemo Cloud settings. Go to the Nemo
Cloud tab in the main view and select Settings.

Please note that this functions requires the Nemo Cloud Basic license option.

Define the Nemo Cloud account settings and click OK.

Now you can send files to Nemo Cloud. Select File | Send Measurement to Server. First select
Nemo Cloud from the bottom left corner of the dialog and then select the measurement files. Click
Finish. The files are sent.

Page 323
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

8.4 Exporting measurements


With the Export Measurements functionality it is possible to export measurement files from Nemo
File Format to MapInfo or .csv formats. Close all measurements and select File | Export
Measurements. You can also export individual measurements through the Measurement report
dialog when you are ending measurements.

The Export Measurements dialog is opened.

Template contains a predefined set of parameters and parameter rules for export. To create a new
template, select New in the Template field and type a name for the template. Then select the
parameters that will be exported and define parameter rules. When you export the parameters, the
settings are saved. The saved template will be available in the Template field the next time you
open the Export Measurements dialog.

With the Add Measurement and Add Folder buttons you can add individual measurement files or
entire folders containing measurement files to be exported.

Export format defines the format in which the files are stored. The options are MapInfo TAB file
and CSV file.

Page 324
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Number of values per parameter defines the maximum number of values exported for
parameters that can have multiple values.

Export interval defines at what rate (in seconds or meters) parameter values are sampled from
the measurement data for export. If you select all, all data is exported.

By default, multiple values of the same parameter are exported in a single column. To create a
separate column for each value, select the Separate values to columns option.

With the Export files to folder option, the individual files will be saved in a folder. Also define the
Target folder.

With the Export to single file option, the selected files will be stored in a single .tab file.

Click the Select Parameters button to define which parameters will be included in the export.

Select a parameter from the list of available parameters and with the arrow button move it to the
right. The selected parameters will be exported.

You can also make more rules for selecting parameter values for export. Only those parameter
values that meet the rule will be exported. Click the Edit Rules button.

Page 325
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Click the + button to add a new rule. Select a parameter and define the operator and value for the
parameter. You can define as many rules as you wish. Finally click OK.

With the Add Parameter functionality user can export some hidden/custom parameters that are
not available for exporting. Enter the Nemo Outdoor internal parameter name and click OK. The OK
button is activated when a valid parameter name is entered.

When you have selected all parameters to be exported, click OK.

Page 326
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

9 USER INTERFACE

The ribbon contains all Nemo Outdoor commands. The commands are arranged in tabs.

Under the Nemo Outdoor button, you will find more commands.

Page 327
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

9.1 View groups


View Groups is a function that allows you to organize measurement windows into different tabs for
easier viewing. This is especially useful if you have several graphs and maps open at the same time
and you have to overlap them to fit them all in the Nemo Outdoor main window. Now you can
create view groups and organize the measurement windows into several groups. Each view group
appears at the bottom of the main window as a tab that you can view by clicking the tab.

When you start Nemo Outdoor for the first time, you will have one default view group. To rename
the default view group, right-click on the tab and select Rename. Enter a name for the view group
and click OK.

To create a new view group, right-click on the empty area next to the existing view groups, and
select Create New. Enter a name for the view group and click OK. The new view group appears as
another tab.

To organize measurement windows into the view groups, open a view group, for example, Maps,
and open the windows that you would like to have in this particular view group. Then go to another
view group by clicking on the respective tab, for example, Graphs and open measurement windows
there. The windows are automatically saved in the view groups and will be opened the next time
you start Nemo Outdoor.

To copy the contents of an existing view group to a new view group, right-click on the view group
label and select Copy to New View Group. Type a name for the new view group and select the
device for which the data is displayed.

If you need to change the device for which the views in a particular view group are displaying data,
right-click the view group label and select Select Device. Select the device from the list. All the
views in the view group will be updated to display data from the selected device.

Page 328
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

9.2 Status bar


The status bar at the bottom of the Nemo Outdoor window gives you variable information
depending on the operations you are performing. For example, when you are pointing to a toolbar
button with the mouse (without clicking), the status bar will show a description of the
corresponding function. You can also see a brief description of the same function in a help box that
appears next to the button when you hold the mouse over the button long enough. There is also a
time slider which you can use to jump into certain points in the measurement.

In the View tab, you can select to hide the status bar; this will bring more space to the other
objects in the main window.

9.3 Parameters view


The Parameters view offers an easy way to open data views for a certain parameter. Click on a
parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on a graph. Alternatively, right-click on the
parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select the graph type (line graph, vertical
bar, map, indoor view, etc.) from the menu.

Page 329
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Parameters can also be opened for several devices at once. First, press down the Ctrl button and
select the devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. After this, right-click on the parameter
you wish to view from the parameter tree and select the graph type from the menu.

Move your mouse pointer on top of a parameter in the Parameters view, and the tooltip will display
more information about that particular parameter. The tooltip text can also be copied to clipboard.

A search string can be used to search parameters, parameter short names and possible alias
names.

9.4 Customizing the ribbon and quick access toolbar


Nemo Outdoor ribbon bar is fully customizable. To edit the ribbon, right-click on the ribbon and
select Customize Quick Access Toolbar.

9.5 Nemo Outdoor windows


The windows in Nemo Outdoor are highly user configurable. Different network parameters and
events can be viewed as line graphs, bars, and dots. To make the measuring process easier for
first-time users, Nemo Outdoor offers some ready-made custom windows that include some
essential windows for specific types of measuring. The users are also able to make their own
custom windows and save them for later use.

Page 330
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

9.5.1 Custom windows


Nemo Outdoor offers a selection of premade graphs and grids which can be quickly accessed
through Data Windows | Custom Windows | Open. The custom windows are grouped under the
corresponding graph and grid types.

You can view the existing custom windows sorted by type (graph, grid, map, indoor view) or by
technology (AMPS, CDMA, GSM, UMTS, etc.). Select the custom window you would like to open
from the table on the right and click Open.

You can also save your own custom windows. When you have set up a graph view that you would
like to use later on, activate the window that you would like to save and select Data Windows |
Custom Windows | Save. Nemo Outdoor will ask you to type a name for the new custom window.
After clicking OK, the window is added to the custom windows list. If you want to remove some
custom windows, select the custom window that you want to remove and click the Delete button.

Page 331
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

9.5.2 Devices view

The Devices view offers easy access to the most common commands and configuration dialogs.
The view displays all devices connected to Nemo Outdoor and the device-specific commands. By
double-clicking the various items in the view, you can access the related configuration dialogs. For
example, double-click the FTP item to access the FTP Transfer Properties dialog.

Page 332
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

It is also possible to select multiple devices (Ctrl+left-click) and define settings that will be applied
to all selected devices. For example, if the same APN is used with several devices, you can select
the devices and define the APN for all devices at one go. When you have selected multiple devices,
you can only edit settings that are supported by all the selected devices.

From the Supported Data Protocols list, select the data protocol (FTP, SMTP, TCP/UDP, etc.)
used in the measurements.

Measurement control button offers access to some


commands that are supported by the selected device, such
as, start/stop voice call, start new data transfer, SMS/MMS
message sending.

Measurement settings button offers access to


configuration and properties dialogs. The selection is device-
specific.

Device connection settings button opens the Device


Configuration dialog (see Configuration Manager -
Devices).

Device notification settings button opens the


Measurement Properties - Notifications page for the
selected device.

Device script settings button opens the Measurement


Properties - Script page for the selected device.

Start/stop script state for selected devices starts/stops


the script.

Group devices button organizes the devices in the view


according to type, measurement server, or operator.

9.5.3 Device Status view

The Device Status view displays the device status for all connected devices. The green light at the
upper left corner is blinking whenever the device is active and connected.

Right-click on the Device Status view and select Reorder Devices to change the order of the
devices in the Device Status and Devices views. Drag and drop the devices in the correct order and
finally click OK.

Page 333
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

9.5.4 Output window

The Output window displays program messages and textual notifications. Icons ( ) next to
the timestamps clarify the type of message or notification in question. For example, the speech
bubble indicates a normal message, the orange flag a warning, the red flag an error message, and
the exclamation mark a notification. The window can be opened by choosing View | Output. You
can clear the Output window by right-clicking on the window and selecting Clear Window from the
popup menu.

9.5.5 Script Status window

Note that since you cannot use scripts with scanners, this window is also not available
when making scanner measurements.

From the Script Status window you can follow the progress of the script file used in the current
measurement.

Page 334
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

This section describes some of the possible problem situations that may occur in Nemo Outdoor.

10.1 Low throughput


In case lower data throughputs are received with Nemo Outdoor compared to third party
applications, read this chapter for troubleshooting throughput problems with various TCP based
protocols.

In case low throughput values are monitored with Nemo Outdoor and also with third party
applications, the issue can most likely be seen by observing link adaptation parameters.

For example, low average CQI and high MAC-HS 3rd retransmission rate indicate an area of bad
coverage or high interference. Low HS-SCCH usage rate (= high HSDPA DTX percentage ratio)
points to capacity, server or transmission problems.

In LTE networks, observe physical resource block allocation (PRB) and signal to noise ratio (SNR).
PRB affects throughput directly. Values less than maximum may indicate other users in the cell, a
bottleneck in the transmission network or not enough data to be sent (application does not need all
the available bandwidth).

Requested throughput much higher than the actual measured throughput may indicate that there
are other users sharing the radio resources of the cell or some other bottleneck in the network that
prevents the mobile from getting the maximum achievable throughput.

High PUSCH TX power values indicate a lack of uplink coverage.

When operating in the dynamic range of link adaptation, average BLER (PDSCH BLER) should be
higher than 0, typically 10-20%, in order to achieve the gain of HARQ retransmission scheme

Residual BLER after all HARQ retransmissions should be 0%. Higher values indicate that the radio
link is about to drop. Observe the MAC downlink/uplink residual BLER (%) values.

Other things that could help troubleshooting:

Disable any firewall and/or antivirus software that could reduce the throughput. Some HSPA
USB interfaces may also install their own software which may affect to window size settings
in registry.

Disable IP capturing from Measurement Properties Measurement page..

Try another FTP server for comparison.

Command prompt FTP throughput. This comparison is recommended because command


prompt FTP does not use any multithreading or other non-standard methods. For better
results, keep Nemo Outdoor at the background measuring the mobile network while making
the transfers. Also try different servers.

For Nemo Outdoor 5.60 and older versions: Run a script with simultaneous FTP transfers to
see if the throughput increases. Does not work manually, script is always needed.

Page 335
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

For Nemo Outdoor 5.70 and later versions: Use the multithread feature of the FTP protocol
to test simultaneous transfers. Works also manually.

10.1.1 All Windows versions

How to check the TCP window size from packet logs:


Using Wireshark:

Check the .pcap file and look at the (non FTP-DATA) TCP traffic in the middle of the transfer.
Window size value tells the current TCP window size used.

Using Nemo Outdoor:

1. Open a packet grid window in Nemo Outdoor.

2. Look at the TCP traffic in the middle of an FTP transfer with PayloadLen=0:

3. Double click the frame to get detailed frame info. Look at the Tcp tree. Window shows the
current value.

Using debug logs (for developers, help desk, etc.):

1. Look for the GetWindowSizeFromRegistry() function.

TCP Window size set to n = Value found from registry.

TCP Window size set to default: n = Value not found from registry. Set to default.

TCP Auto-Tuning detected. Window size not set. = Windows Vista/7 is using auto-tuning
TCP window.

2. A measurement file does not save window size info. Packet log and/or debug log is always
needed.

Page 336
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Windows does not use static window sizes from the registry. They rely on dynamic window size
which is handled by TCP auto-tuning feature. However, if the same registry value that XP uses is
set, Outdoor reads it and adjusts the manual window size based on this value. In most cases, the
registry has been edited by a third party software or a USB mobile interface driver/software. This
registry entry can be removed.

If TCP auto-tuning is disabled, Windows will limit the window size to 64 KB even if the value has
been configured to be higher from Nemo Outdoor.

How to check TCP auto-tuning state:


1. Open command prompt by typing CMD to Search programs and files field.

2. Type netsh interface tcp show global

3. Receive Window Auto-Tuning Level shows the current state.

Please note that administrator rights are required to change auto-tuning settings.

Page 337
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

4. Open command prompt by typing CMD to Search programs and files field. Right-click
and select Run as administrator.

5. To disable auto-tuning type netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=disabled. This limits
the TCP window size to 64KB.

6. To increase the maximum TCP window size that auto-tuning uses, type netsh interface tcp
set global autotuning=highlyrestricted.

7. Below are all the values of auto-tuning level with explanations:

disabled: Uses a fixed value for the TCP receive window. Limits to 64 KB (65535).

highlyrestricted: Recommended. Allows the receive window to grow beyond its default
value, very conservatively.

restricted: Recommended. Somewhat restricted growth of the TCP receive window beyond
its default value.

normal: Default value. Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate most
conditions.

experimental: Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate extreme scenarios (not
recommended, it can degrade performance in common scenarios, only intended for
research purposes). It enables receive window values of over 16 MB.

Page 338
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

10.2 Device Status view


The Device Status view displays the device status.

If a green light is blinking, it means that the device is properly connected to Nemo Outdoor and is
functioning normally.

If a red light is blinking, it means that the device has been disconnected. Connect the device, right-
click on the device in the Devices view and select Reset.

10.3 Cannot add devices


If the Add button is deactivated in the Configuration Manager window when you start Nemo
Outdoor, your version of Nemo Outdoor is an unlicensed evaluation version. Please, see chapter
Licensing for more information.

If the HASP USB key is plugged in and the Add button is deactivated, check that recording is not
on. Also, playback should be stopped and playback files closed (File | Close Measurement).

10.4 Required license option missing


If the error message below appears, your copy protection dongle is missing a license option. In
other words, the measurement device supports technologies or features that require additional
license options. For example, if you are measuring with an LTE-A Cat 6 device and you have
purchased the LTE license instead of the LTE-A license, you can use the device with Nemo
Outdoor/Nemo Invex II but the LTE-A parameters will be missing. Please contact Nemo Technical
Support (nemosupport@anite.com) if you wish to purchase the additional license options.

Page 339
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

10.5 Cannot make calls/packet transfers


If the commands are inactive in the Measurement control menu , check that you have devices
online.

10.6 Measurement file checksum notification


Measurement file has a checksum that detects modifications to the measurement file after the
measurement is stopped. The checksum is validated when loading measurement files for playback.
The user is notified by the Nemo Outdoor user interface when opening a measurement file where
modification is detected. However, measurement files are still opened normally. The last line in the
measurement file is HASH events including time stamp and checksum information.

#HASH,14:46:49.262,1,"0360D938749FFE82B15545D3E55B75C0"

Measurement files made with Nemo Outdoor 5.4 or earlier do not include checksum information and
the notification is always prompted when such a file is opened with Nemo Outdoor version 5.50 or
later.

10.7 Number of USB devices exceeded


With new laptops an error may occur when six or more USB devices are connected to the laptop.

The current of the USB hub used by the laptop exceeds the max. value per device and the driver
blocks additional devices. This applies especially to the USB 3.0 host controllers based on the Intel
chipset.

The issue can be fixed by uninstalling the Intel USB 3.0 host controller driver.

Note that especially with Lenovo computers, the driver is automatically installed
with system updates. Automated updates should be disabled.

Page 340
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

11 SHORTCUT KEYS

This is a complete list of the shortcut keys available in Nemo Outdoor. This window can be displayed
by pressing down the F2 key when using Nemo Outdoor.

Page 341
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

12 NOTIFICATION SYMBOLS

Below are described the default notification symbols.

Attach Attempt MMS Receiving Attempt

Attach Failed MMS Receiving Failed

Attach Success MMS Receiving Success

MMS Sending Attempt

Call Alerting MMS Sending Failed

Call Answered MMS Sending Success

Call Attempt

Call Connected Packet Call Attempt

Call Disconnect Packet Call Connected

Call Dropped Packet Call Disconnected

Call Failed Packet Call Failed

Call Received Packet Technology Changed to HSDPA

Packet Technology Changed to UMTS

Cell Change Attempt PTT Idle

Cell Change Failed PTT Receiving

Cell Change Success PTT Transmitting

Cell Reselection

Cell Reselection (3G) GSM/UMTS RX Level Low/Bad

Cell Reselection (2G) UMTS/GSM Routing Area Update Attempt

Page 342
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Routing Area Update Failed

Context Activation Attempt Routing Area Update Success

Context Activation Failed

Context Activation Success Semiduplex Call Attempt

Context Deactivation Service Lost

Service Received

Data Call Attempt

Data Connection Attempt SMS/USSD Received

Data Connection Failed SMS/USSD Receiving Attempt

Data Connection Success SMS/USSD Receiving Failed

Data Disconnect SMS/USSD Sending Completed

Data Transfer Attempt

Data Transfer Success Soft Handover Failure

Data Transfer Failed Soft Handover Success

Dead Reckoning in Use TX Power High/UL Power Up High

Detach

Differential GPS in Use Video Call Attempt

Duplex Call Attempt Voice Call Attempt/Voice Call Attempt


(ETSI)

FER High Voice Call Connected (ETSI)

Voice Call Disconnected (ETSI)

GPS Fix Lost Voice Call Dropped (ETSI)

GPS Fix Received

Page 343
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

HS-DSCH Serving Cell Changed Star

Thumb Down

Handover Attempt Thumb Up

Handover Failed

Handover Success

Location Area Update Attempt

Location Area Update Failed

Location Area Update Success

Marker

Markov Call Attempt

Measurement Error

Page 344
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

13 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

If you have questions on or beyond this documentation about Nemo tools, please contact our
technical support service through Nemo Support Portal at http://nemosupport.anite.com, call us
(local phone numbers can be found in chapter Phone and Email Support) or send us an email at
nemosupport@anite.com. Note that for full support you need to have the Maintenance Agreement.

13.1 User Club


Nemo User Club offers several new ways to benefit from Nemo products. You can find it from
http://nemouserclub.anite.com.

Access to the Nemo User Club is restricted to customers with SW maintenance and Technical
Support agreements or partner agreements. If you are an existing Anite Finland customer with SW
maintenance and Technical Support agreements, but you are without access to the User Club,
please complete an on-line registration form.

After submitting the requested information, you will receive a personal access key and password by
email in a few days time.

Once you are registered with our User Club, you will automatically receive e-mails informing you
each time a new version of software for your Nemo Product is released. It is fast, easy, and it is
available to you seven days a week, 24 hours a day.

13.2 Nemo Support Portal


Nemo Support Portal is a web interface for technical support, product-related questions, and RMA
requests. It offers a fast and convenient way to reach our technical support team and submit repair,
warranty repair, and calibration requests. Customers can open a support ticket, follow the status of
existing tickets, and request technical support 24/7/365. Furthermore the Nemo Support Portal
includes a Knowledge Base for the most frequent and latest topics on Nemo Products. Submitting a
ticket via Nemo Support Portal ensures that our technical specialists have all the necessary
information available to solve your support case, resulting in faster response times.

Please go to http://nemosupport.anite.com to access the portal and click Request access to obtain
a password to the system.

13.3 Phone and Email Support


During the warranty period, the phone support related to potential software errors is free of
additional charge. Registered users with a valid Maintenance Agreement are entitled to full support.
Nemo Support Portal is the preferred channel for technical support requests, but you can also send
us an email. When emailing, please let us know the number of your Software Maintenance and
Support Agreement.

Please contact us at the following locations (global email address nemosupport@anite.com):

Page 345
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Global
Tel. +358 50 395 7800

Americas
Tel. +1 469 951 9105
+1 469 774 4608 (En espaol e
portugus)

APAC
Tel. +65 9746 2431

P.R. China
Tel. +86 10 6567 8528

India
Tel. +91 982 0016372

Page 346
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

14 APPENDIX 1

14.1 Making MapInfo raster maps


Using raster image files, you can bring paper maps, photographs, and other graphic images into
MapInfo. You can scan paper maps and then use paper maps as the foundation for the maps you
create in MapInfo. After scanning the paper map into a raster image file, you can display it in a
map window.

Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze support .TIF, .GIF, and .JPG formats. MapInfo can read the
following types of raster images:

filename.TIF

filename.GIF

filename.JPG

filename.PCX

filename.BMP

filename.BIL

Color options are:

Monochrome images: each pixel in a map image can be black or white.

Gray scale images: each pixel in a gray scale image can be black, white, or a shade of gray.

Color images: each pixel can be of any color from a palette of available colors. MapInfo
supports 256 colors. When using Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze, we recommend using
gray scale images. By doing this, the measurement route can be discerned better than with
color map images.

14.1.1 Registering a raster map with MapInfo SW


If you want to overlay vector data on top of a raster image, then you must register the raster map
image so that MapInfo can position it properly in a Map window. You do this in the Image
Registration Dialog. You must identify control point coordinates and the projection of the raster
image map. It is important to provide accurate control point information when registering a raster
map image. Choose control points that can be easily identified and selected, such as street
intersections or use the coordinates (latitude and longitude grid) for the selected point from a paper
map.

To register a raster map:


1. Start the MapInfo software. Choose File | Open Table and Raster Image File Format.
Select your raster map image file (.TIF, .GIF, .JPG) and open it. The Image Registration
Dialog is displayed. A preview of the raster map image appears on the screen.

Page 347
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

2. Select the Projection button to specify the projection of the raster image map. If you do
not know the right projection, the default value is Longitude/ Latitude.

3. Start adding control points. Click on a location in the preview (raster image map). The Add
Control Point Dialog is displayed showing the location of the point in pixels. Add Map X and
Map Y coordinates in decimal formats. For example, to specify the coordinates 65 degrees,
30 minutes, enter 65.5 degrees. Use negative numbers when specifying west and south
coordinates. If you want to register a raster map that does not use longitude and latitude
coordinates, specify the appropriate projection in the Image Registration Dialog. Enter your
coordinates in the native units of the coordinate system. For example, if you are registering
a UTM map image, enter coordinates in meters. Using the MapBasic program, you can
convert d/m/s coordinates into decimal degrees format, or the conversion from d/m/s to
decimal degrees is as follows: degrees+(minutes/60)+(seconds/3600)=decimal
degrees

4. You must choose at least three control points. Select points that can be easily identified and
selected in the map window.

5. After all control points have been defined, click OK in the Image Registration dialog. The
raster map will be displayed in the map window.

6. Move filename.tab and filename.tif/gif/jpg files to the map directory of Nemo Outdoor or
Nemo Analyze.

7. Open filename.tab in Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze.

Page 348
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

15 END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

IMPORTANT - READ CAREFULLY: This End-User License Agreement ("EULA") is a legal


agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Anite Network Testing Ltd for
the Anite Network Testing Ltd software product(s), in whatever form, identified above ("Software
Product" or "Software"). The Software Product includes computer software, the associated media,
any printed materials, and any "online" or electronic documentation. By installing, copying or
otherwise using the Software Product, you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA. If you do
not agree to the terms of this EULA, Anite Network Testing Ltd is unwilling to license the Software
Product to you. In such event, you may not use or copy the Software Product, and you should
promptly return the unused product(s) in their original packaging to the place of purchase within
thirty days of the date of original purchase.

SOFTWARE PRODUCT LICENSE

The Software Product is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as well as
other intellectual property laws and treaties. The Software Product is licensed, not sold.

1. GRANT OF LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following rights:

Software. You agree that the Software product is licensed to you to be used with the mobile
phone(s) and software protection key designated by Anite Network Testing Ltd for such use
("Designated Hardware"). You also agree that you shall not have more than one copy of the
Software Product in use at a time for any Designated Hardware in which the Software Product is to
be used or to be distributed except as expressly provided for in this EULA. You may use one copy of
the Software Product in binary code form only on one computer at a time in order to conduct
system measurements using the Designated Hardware at various locations to the extent necessary
for the permitted operation of the application software but may not duplicate the Software Product.

Storage/Network/Single Use. You may also store or install a copy of the Software Product in
binary code form only over an internal network, and distribute the Software Product to your other
computers over an internal network. However, you must acquire and dedicate a license for the
Software Product for each Designated Hardware on which the Software Product is used or to which
it is distributed. A license for the Software Product may not be shared or used concurrently on
different computers.

2. DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS.

Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly. Removal, emulation,


or reverse engineering of all or any part of this product or its protection constitutes an unauthorized
modification to the product and is specifically prohibited. Nothing in this license statement permits
you to derive the source or assembly code of files provided to you in executable or object formats.

Limitations on Modifications, Adaptations and Other Changes. You may not modify, adapt or
otherwise make any changes to the Software Product except and only to the extent you are
expressly permitted to do so under the applicable mandatory law notwithstanding this limitation or
by Anite Network Testing Ltd's prior written consent.

Page 349
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Separation of Components. The Software Product is licensed as a single product. Its component
parts may not be separated for use on more than one Designated Hardware and computer as
designated above.

Not for Resale. This Software Product is Not for Resale" or "NFR" and your license only permits
personal use and you may not sell or otherwise transfer the Software Product for value except as
specified below.

Rental. You may not rent, lease or lend the Software Product to any person or entity.

Software Transfer. You may not otherwise give or permanently transfer any or all of your rights
under this EULA without the express prior written consent of Anite Network Testing Ltd which such
consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.

Security Mechanisms. Anite Network Testing and its affiliated companies take all legal steps to
eliminate piracy of their software products. In this context, the Software may include a security
mechanism that can detect the installation or use of illegal copies of the Software, and collect and
transmit data about those illegal copies. Data collected will not include any customer data created
with the Software. By using the Software, you consent to such detection and collection of data, as
well as its transmission and use if an illegal copy is detected. Anite Network Testing also reserves
the right to use a hardware lock device, license administration software, and/or a license
authorization key to control access to the Software. You may not take any steps to avoid or defeat
the purpose of any such measures. Use of any Software without any required lock device or
authorization key provided by Anite Network Testing is prohibited.

Duration and Termination. This EULA is effective from the day you open the sealed media
package or download and continues until termination. You may terminate this EULA at any time.
Without prejudice to any other rights, Anite Network Testing Ltd may terminate this EULA if you fail
to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. In either event, you must destroy all copies
of the Software Product and all associated media, printed materials, updates and component parts
and verify to Anite Network Testing Ltd in writing that such has been done.

3. SUPPORT SERVICES. Anite Network Testing Ltd may provide you with support services related to
the Software Product ("Support Services"). Any supplemental software code provided to you as part
of the Support Services shall be considered part of the Software Product and subject to the terms
and conditions of this EULA. With respect to technical information you provide to Anite Network
Testing Ltd as part of the Support Services, Anite Network Testing Ltd may use such information for
its business purpose, including for product updates and development.

4. COPYRIGHT AND TRADEMARKS. All title and copyrights in and to the Software Product (including
but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and "applets",
incorporated into the Software Product), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the
Software Product, are owned by Anite Network Testing Ltd or its suppliers. The Software Product is
protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions. You may not copy the printed
materials accompanying the Software Product. You may not remove, modify or alter any Anite
Network Testing Ltd copyright or trademark from any part of the Software Product, including but
not limited to any such notices contained in the physical and/or electronic media or documentation,
in the Anite Network Testing Ltd Setup Wizard dialogue or 'about' boxes, in any of the runtime
resources and/or in any web-presence or web-enabled notices, code or other embodiments
originally contained in or dynamically or otherwise created by the Software Product.

The Software Product may include following licenses with related copyrights and titles:

WinWAP. Copyright Winwap Technologies Oy. http://www.winwap.com

Page 350
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Perceptual Objective Listening Quality Analysis (POLQA) according to ITU-T Recommendation P. 863
included in this product is protected by copyright and by European, US and other International
patents and patent applications and is provided under license from

OPTICOM Dipl.-Ing. M. Keyhl GmbH, Erlangen, Germany, 2011 www.opticom.de

POLQA is a registered trademark of OPTICOM GmbH. Used by permission. 2011 by the POLQA
Coalition of OPTICOM GmbH, Germany - SwissQual AG, Switzerland - KPN, The Netherlands - TNO,
The Netherlands.

www.polqa.info

Further statements shall be incorporated to prohibit additional copying of the POLQA software in
whole or in part, other than is essential for the proper operation of the POLQA software or for
normal security back-up purposes; prevent the End-User from modifying, translating, reverse-
engineering or decompiling the POLQA software except to the extent permitted by law; require that
the acknowledgement of the rights in the POLQA software shall not be removed from the POLQA
software or any installation of it;

Perceptual Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ) measurement technology included in this product is
protected by copyright and by European, US and other patents and is provided under license from
OPTICOM Dipl.-Ing. M. Keyhl GmbH, Erlangen, Germany, 2008 - www.opticom.de

For further information please refer to www.pesq.org

Further statements shall be incorporated to prohibit additional copying of the PESQ software in
whole or in part, other than is essential for the proper operation of the PESQ software or for normal
security back-up purposes; prevent the End-User from modifying, translating, reverse-engineering
or decompiling the PESQ software except to the extent permitted by law; require that the
acknowledgement of the rights in the PESQ software shall not be removed from the PESQ software
or any installation of it;

Evaluation of Talker Quality (ECHO) measurement technology included in this product is protected
by copyright and is provided under license from

OPTICOM GmbH, Erlangen, Germany, 2011 - www.opticom.de

Further statements shall be incorporated to prohibit additional copying of the ECHO software in
whole or in part, other than is essential for the proper operation of the ECHO software or for normal
security back-up purposes; prevent the End-User from modifying, translating, reverse-engineering
or decompiling the ECHO software except to the extent permitted by law; require that the
acknowledgement of the rights in the ECHO software shall not be removed from the ECHO software
or any installation of it;

Libresample library and libVLC library distributed under LGPL license. For detailed information, see
license files located in the software installation directory.

Skype is a trade mark of Skype or its related companies. This product/application has not been
approved or endorsed by Skype, Skype Communications S.a.r.l. or any of their related companies.

The license management portion of this Licensee Application is based on:

Page 351
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

SentinelRMS*

1989-2006 SafeNet, Inc.

All rights reserved

SentinelRMSe*

1989-2006 SafeNet, Inc.

All rights reserved

Iperf copyright. Copyright (c) 1999-2006, The Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois. All
Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of
this software (Iperf) and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: Redistributions of source code
must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimers.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimers in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution. Neither the names of the University of Illinois, NCSA, nor the names of its contributors
may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this Software without specific prior
written permission. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
CONTIBUTORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.

5. DUAL-MEDIA SOFTWARE. You may receive the Software Product in more than one medium.
Regardless of the type or size of medium you receive, you may use only that one medium that is
appropriate for the systems you use to operate the Software Product. You may not use or install
the other medium on any system. You may not loan, rent, lease or otherwise transfer the other
medium to another user, except as part of the permanent transfer (as provided above) of the
Software Product.

6. CONFIDENTIALITY AND NON-DISCLOSURE. You agree to keep in confidence and not to disclose
in any manner or form to any third party nor publish any such data or information related to the
Software Product. You agree to protect all information and data provided to you by Anite Network
Testing Ltd related to the Software Product with the same degree of care that you use to protect
your own like data and information, but with not less than that due care exercised by a reasonably
prudent person under the same or similar circumstances.

7. U.S. GOVERNMENTAL RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software Product and documentation are
provided with Restricted Rights. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to
restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer
Software clause at DFARS 252.277-7013 or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial
Computer Software - Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52-227-19, as applicable.

Page 352
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

8. LIMITED WARRANTY. Anite Network Testing Ltd warrants that (a) the Software Product will
perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of three
(3) months from the date of receipt, and (b) any third party hardware accompanying the Software
Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a
period of one (1) year from the date of receipt. To the extent that implied warranties are
disclaimable, they are disclaimed in paragraph 10. Some states/jurisdictions do not allow
disclaimers of or limitations on duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. Any implied warranties on the Software Product and, as applicable, third party
hardware that is not disclaimable are limited to three (3) months and one (1) year respectively.

9. CUSTOMER REMEDIES. Anite Network Testing Ltd and its suppliers' entire liability and your
exclusive remedy shall be, at Anite Network Testing Ltd option, either (a) return of the price paid,
or (b) repair or replacement of the software or hardware that does not meet the Limited Warranty
contained in this EULA and which is returned to Anite Network Testing Ltd. The Limited Warranty
contained herein is void if failure of the software or third party hardware has resulted from accident,
abuse, misapplication or events beyond the control of Anite Network Testing Ltd including, but not
limited to Acts of God, acts of nature or acts of war. Any replacement Software Products or
hardware will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Anite Network Testing Ltd is not responsible for ensuring adequate backup and
storage for your data or records.

10. NO OTHER WARRANTIES. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, Anite Network
Testing Ltd disclaims all other warranties, either express or implied, including but not limited to
implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, and non-infringement of
third-party rights, with regard to the Software Product, the accompanying written materials, and
any accompanying hardware. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have
others which vary from state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction.

11. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. To the maximum extent permitted by


applicable law, in no event shall Anite Network Testing Ltd or its suppliers be liable for any damages
whatsoever (including without limitation, special, incidental, consequential, punitive or indirect
damages for personal injury, loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business
information, or any other pecuniary loss) arising out of the use of or inability to use this Software
Product, even if Anite Network Testing Ltd has been advised of the possibility of such damages. In
any case, Anite Network Testing Ltd and its suppliers' entire liability under any provision of this
EULA shall be limited to the amount actually paid by you for the Software Product and/or third party
hardware accompanying the Software Product. The Limitations of Liability contained in this Section
apply to claims of every kind, whether based on contract law, tort law or otherwise, even if these
limitations have the effect of exculpating a party from responsibility for its negligence, fault or other
conduct. Because some states/jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability for
consequential or incidental damages, the above limitation may not apply to you.

Page 353

Вам также может понравиться